Home

User Manual

1. Icon definition area If you clear the Symbol but ton there is nothing else to be defined in this area If on the contrary this button is checked you have to choose the representation of the object in the combo box opposite the button Then depending on the symbol chosen you have to define additional parameters such as Line color and width Fill color and effect This area is constantly updat ed to show the aspect of the object as you define the style Shows Hides error ellipse tied to the point Ellipse centered on the point Vertical precision represented as a vertical seg ment positioned next to the point 166 Reference Working in a Map Document When you have finished with the style definition click the Finish button The new layer now appears in the Map Properties dialog box As a default setting the check button opposite has been checked so that all the objects meeting the layer criteria be seen on the map Legend View M Control Points Cancel This dialog box includes a number of buttons that can be used for the fol lowing 7 O oO O to modify an existing layer to delete the selected layer from the legend BI to move the selected layer upward in the list The layer posi tioned first in the list is brought to the front on the map to move the selected layer downward in the list The laye
2. 29 Q Step 8 Performing Coordinate Calibration ccccccccsccessscceecsscecessseccessseeceesseeeeess 26 LY Step 9 Exporting Data to a File ccc ccccccccssseccessseceeesscecessseccesaseceeseseeessseeesseeeeees 28 LI Step 10 Generating a Report cccccccccssscccssseccessseeeeesseecessseccessseesesseecesseeceesseeeeees 30 LY Step 11 Creating a Background Map Project cccccccscccessseccessececesseeeesseeceesseeeeens 31 A Step F122 Importing a Vector Layer sarino aa a 32 Q Step 13 Importing a Raster Image ccc cccscccesseccessseeeeesseecesseceesssceeeesseeeeseeeeens 34 LI Step 14 Combining Survey Results amp Vector Raster Layers on a Map 00006 38 A Step 15 Closing the Project dss ssscsissasseieaiansecstcnseoansvies daar saueabuadiasisuanet gota seecaverstenases 45 Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing ccceesssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 46 A Peano ourora ana AAAA EE AEAT EE A ENA A AO 46 Ey Step Fl Creating a New PLO CO Giccsa cscs ccc jen vecsarevenceioeussnsaneraa isa a a A 47 LY Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data cccccccccsssccessseccessseecesseeceeesseeeesseeeeens 48 LY Step 3 Analyzing the Results ccccccccccssscccssseccessseeeeesseecesseccesseeecesssecesssseceesseeeeees 51 LI Step 4 Re processing the Baseline in Kinematic Mode cccccccceesecceesseeceesseeeeees 54 LY Step 5 Exporting Data to a File ccc iccccccccesseccesssce
3. cccccccssscccesseccessseeeeesseeeesssseeeeaees 175 LY Defining the X Axis of a Time Document ccccccesccccesccceesseeecesseeceesseeeeessseeeeaees 176 LY Defining the Y Axis of a Time Documentt cccccccecessceceesseeecesseeceesseeeeessseeesaees 177 Working in a Graph Document cc cccccccecccssssssseeeeeeeeeeceesseseeessneeeaeaeeeeeeeees 179 LY Creating a Graph Document in an Open Project ccecccscceessseeeesseeceesseeeeesseeeeessaes 179 EN Merri ihe xand Y ASren a AAA A SA 179 Q Adding a new curve on the same graph sssssssssssssssesssressesessrersseisssresseressnerssserese 180 Q Zooming in on BAGTADI s sicesdcisxscctasestesesgsininsavesnaaiartsdsaneieiaysossaduauiveciaiargsinwcasee waraeers 181 iii GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Chapter 4 Mission Planning Utility ccccccccsscsssssssssccccccscssseessssssees L83 DAO GIAG 01 Od E REEE scence EE E sees AETA AENA tage taste 183 Almanacs used in the prediction ccccccccccccsssssscceecececeesessessssaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeens 186 Q Opening aset of AlN ACS cas ajecacecneccsaaeskususadunseoteunasectuasseceatv NENSETER ANE Naaa 186 Q Importing a new set of SEM type almanacs cccccccsscceesscccesssececessseceesseeeesseeeeenas 187 L Viewing the set of almanacs used ccccccccessscceessccecessseccessececesseeeeeesseecesssecceseeeeess 188 Defining the Observation point 00 0 0 cee cccccsessceeeeeeecee
4. Insert the GNSS Studio CD ROM in the computer s CD drive Click on the Import Raw Data from Files on Disk button This opens the Browse dialog box Using the Look in combo box select the following folder on the GNSS Studio CD ROM Samples Static While holding down the Shift key click on the first and then on the last filename in the list to select all the observation files GPS data files present in the folder 62 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Click the Open button to start importing these files into the project A message then appears denoting data loading in progress In the Importing GPS Data dialog box that appears afterward see figure below GNSS Studio shows the properties of the raw data files you want to import on top You can also define control points For those points you will want to fix you will be able to enter their true coordinates at the bottom of the dia log box Click in the Name cell located underneath the Control Points header A down arrow then appears in this cell m 3 m e pa m AN Click on this down arrow and then from the drop down list that appears select the first point you want to use as a control point Here select PALO Importing GPS Data 10 xi Raw Data a E Ste __ Time b b1112b98 273 September 30 1998 17 50 E vertical __ b0008a98
5. The Tau test passes indicating that the magnitude of the normalized resid ual is not greater than the expected limit for the residual This is usually a good indication that the observation is free of blunders The Tau test fails indicating that the magnitude of the normalized resid ual is greater than expected The observation failing the test should be checked for blunders The tau test is automatically performed by the adjustment module of GNSS Studio Each residual is tested and the outcome of the test is presented in a check button along with the residuals for each observation It is important to understand that if a residual does not pass a statistical test it does not mean that there is a blunder in that observation The observation is merely flagged so that it can be examined and a decision about its retention or rejection can be made Blind rejection is never recommended A blunder in one observation usually affects the residuals in other observations There fore the tests will often flag other observations in addition to the ones con taining blunders If one or more observations are flagged the search begins to determine if there is a blunder 323 Appendices 1 2 Blunder Detection Tools In summary the Tau test examines observation residuals in an attempt to lo cate observations that may contain blunders Each residual is tested to deter mine if it passes or fails the test Ifaresidual passes the Tau te
6. Control Points for the new layer in the Alias field Then click J on the right A new dialog box opens Ihn this dialog box set the attribute filter as shown below Attribute and filter E x Attribute res Type gt Filter equals Control Point And Or Cancel 164 Reference Working in a Map Document Click OK Your current filter setting appears in a new dialog box Control Points Properties Fi xj Collection Tuto_2 Points As Layer Control Points Filters pen sz Attribute Filter 123 Type 5 7 O oO O O O 165 3 Reference Working in a Map Document Click Next The Style dialog box now displays You can do the following to customize the appearance of an object type on the map Label definition area If you clear the Text button there is nothing else to be defined in this area If on the contrary this button is checked you have to define The attribute used as label The color used for characters Background color if Back button checked Location of the label with respect to the icon 9 preset locations Layer Wizard Style Use these buttons to adjust the size of the object on the map o MV Line E Vv Fill CI C TI A Be Normal C Selected M Display error ellipse ea Check this button to see what the object looks like when se lected
7. W Automatic transfer Make sure the Z Max data collector is connected to your office computer via a serial line On the data collector side run FAST Sur vey On the File tab select the Data Transfer function and then run Sur vCADD Carlson Survey Transfer The data collector should now display Awaiting Connection On the PC side keep the Automatic Trans fer box checked Then click OK to start the data transfer 239 Geoids Utility Uploading a Geoid Model into a System 240 ki Should the Geoids module fail to connect to the field terminal please resume the above procedure in Manual Mode i e clear the Automatic trans fer check box when Geoids displays the above dialog box This will open the SurvCom window From this window you will be able to check the PC port settings cf Options button try again to connect to the field terminal cf Connect button and then if the connection is successful resume data trans fer cf Transfer button In that case the file that you would have to select in the left hand pane before clicking the Transfer button would be in the form lt Geoid gt gsf where lt Geoid gt is the name of the open geoid model This file contains the geoid data The left hand pane would be automatically positioned on the Temp folder where this file would have temporarily been stored If you are using a Thales Navigation receiver from the 6000 or 6500 series the following dialog box opens
8. When you define the datum used type the name of the desired datum grid NADCON or GR3DF97A in the Datum name field This field is a combo box but you can also directly type text in this field As a result the following message is displayed in the right hand part of the dialog box Coordinate System Wizard Datum x Datum Name WGS 84 NADCON H Ellipsoid Name Wass ss Semi major Axis 6378137 000m Inverse Flattening 298 257223563 Mean DX to WGS84 000m 00000 Mean DY to WGS84 0 000 m Overwritten by NGS NADCON transformation Mean DZ to WGS84 0 000 m NAD27 lt gt NAD83 Mean Rx to wGs84 foooooo0o tt Mean RY to wGS84 o oo0000 O Mean RZ to wGS84 o oo0000 ts Mean K towGs84 1 000000000000 lt Back Cancel If some points in your surveys happen to be located beyond the geo graphical area covered by the datum grid a warning message will appear in the lower part of the Point properties dialog box 327 1 2 Appendices Database in a Land Survey Project Database in a Land Survey Project Q Files Collection Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D point expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following classic attributes Ate Name File name Ae Full_Path Ashtech file full path name 123 Source Source file format 4 Start_Time Time of first record D Time_Span Record duration 23 Sampling Sampling interval s 123 Epochs Count of re
9. eraw navcen uscg gov ftp G PS almanacs sem Save desired file on your hard disk then use de File Open command to load it Cancel Click OK to launch your Internet browser which then automatically con nects to the requested site Choose the desired set of almanacs from the list and then display it on the screen Save this set of almanacs as a TXT file in your local Raw directory then leave the site UOISSIJA az a 5 jul e va To use this new set of almanacs open it in Mission Planning as explained pre viously 187 Mission Planning Utility Almanacs used in the prediction LI Viewing the set of almanacs used On the menu bar select View gt Almanac The main window then shows the set of almanacs currently used in the form of numerical data Click on Page Up or Page Down or on the corresponding keys on the keyboard to view the almanac for the next or previous satellite each screen provides the orbital parameters for a single satellite Example of almanac for satellite No 1 at the specified date and time Prediction Almanac 1 29 Thursday May 31 2001 16 38 24 188 oy PAR Health 0 Eccentricity 0 57 25045E 2 Time of Applicability 405504 Orbital Inclination Aa TE 5 6433 Rate of Aight Ascen degs b428E Semi Mlajor Axis m 265568562 250 Right Ascen at TOA 21234 BBB Argument of Penge eb 46 59 SORA Mean nom Tee tes 6663 SY Clock Bi
10. Select lt Project_Name gt Areas in the combo box click a then start draw ing the limits of the area by clicking on the start point then at the end of each new segment forming the area Double click on the map to close the area If you double click on a point other than the area s start point GNSS Studio will automatically create the missing segment allowing it to close the geometric figure In the dialog box that opens complete the fields defining the area on the Line tab and then click OK to close the dialog box The new area then appears on the map Its representation relies on the definition of the ayer this area belongs to see next two paragraphs 160 Reference Working in a Map Document Q Showing Hiding a Collection on a Map Document On the map pop up menu select Legend This dialog box provides the list of existing layers If the button opposite is checked then all the objects from a collection meeting the criteria of this layer see below will be vis ible on the map On the contrary if this button is cleared none of these objects will appear on the map LI Selecting an Object in a Dense Area To select an object on a map document click D on the Map toolbar or select this button on the Map menu and then click on the desired object on the map document If the area where you click is not populated with too many objects then GNSS Studio will be able to find the object you want to select and will highl
11. 300 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Inthe Processes collection as simultaneous observations are found an object is created to describe the following pseudo baseline in our exam ple RefStart In case of a survey in Stop amp Go mode GNSS Studio will also feed the Stops collection after analyzing the marks found in the imported file In the Processes collection new objects will be created only for the detected marks gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Before proceeding to the next step the operator has to enter the coordinates and attributes of the reference point 4th step Processing baselines Use the Project gt Process All Baselines command Choose the adequate mode to perform this operation Dynamic is the one to be used for pure trajectory processing Stop amp Go is the one to be used in case of a survey conducted in Stop amp Go mode After the validation step the ultimate results are stored as objects in the fol lowing collections Points Lines no new object is created in this collection if you have selected Stop amp Go As there cannot be any redundancy in the data recorded when surveying a tra jectory there is no point in using the network adjustment command 5th step Analyzing results amp creating a report Use the Project gt Land Survey Report command to generate a project report GNSS Studio uses the VB Script macro saved in
12. A file object is said to be dynamic if it proceeds from dynamic or Stop amp Go logging 1 For a dynamic or Stop amp Go log file GNSS Studio will be able to anchor the sur veyed trajectory on the map from its start point 2 Assigning PO to the file also allows GNSS Studio to locate the file on a map PO is definitively tied to the file whereas the same PO assigned to the point will be updated as new computations are run to refine this position 296 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Finally a new object is created in the Points collection and PO is assigned to this point If however a point already exists in the database with the name specified at the beginning of the import operation no new object will be created in the Points collection and in this case PO will not be assigned to this point In the case of a survey in Stop amp Go mode GNSS Studio will update the Stops collection to report all the marks or events detected in the log file In the project database GNSS Studio searches for files that coincide in time partially or completely with the file that has just been created If concomitant files are found new objects are created in the Processes collection Each of these objects describes a baseline The baseline is oriented in such a way that the first point mentioned is more likely than the other to be a reference point The probability is all the more important as the point
13. Ed 06 26 02 17 1 b Bytes 0 KIJA To access a parent directory double click the Up One Level string To open a folder appearing in any of the panes double click it 255 Commands Available Commands Available Connect button When launching SurvCom this button is automatically actuated to try to connect to the external device As explained earlier if the connection to this external device fails click this button to try the connection again You can change the connection parameters by clicking the Options button tansi Transfer button This command is used to transfer files The list on the left shows files on the PC The list on the right shows files on the data collector To move files from one to another highlight the files and press the Trans fer button Oc A ai saran Set Path button This command allows you to set the path on either the local PC or the remote data collector 4 Set Path x Select Enter path Fath Local PC Remote Machine Cancel 256 SurvCom Utility SurvCom Utility Commands Available Type in the path you wish to change to choose Local PC or Remote Machine and then press OK You may also change the path by navigating the directory structure shown in the main window of the SurvCom program Cy ell Make Dir button This command allows you to create a directory on either the Local PC or the Rem
14. Q Creating a Time Document in an Open Project 7 O oO O To help you understand how you can create a time document please open the Tuto 2 project you have created earlier See Tutorials chapter Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Project topic bar and then on the Create New Document icon This opens the New dialog box On the Documents tab select Time from the list Name the new docu ment by typing a name in the File Name field For example type in Timel Keep the other default choices Active project prompted in the Add to project field Blank Folder field means that the document will be saved in the active project folder Click OK A new blank time document opens on the View pane 175 3 Reference Working in a Time Document LI Defining the X Axis of a Time Document 176 On the menu bar select Time gt View This opens the Time Diagram Properties dialog box showing the content of the View tab This tab defines the X axis of the time document date amp time at the ori gin date amp time at the end of the diagram When you create a time doc ument GNSS Studio analyzes the observation files present in the project and determines the period of time covered by these files The 4 time parameters on the View tab are then automatically set to match this period of time x Legend View Period Start Date Start Time vase 7 57 53 A
15. Reference Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Remember however that you can change the aspect of any layer repre sented in a map document 1 e choose different colors shapes and or change the data filter applied to the layer To do this select Legend on the Map menu highlight the layer and click on Ei Adjusted Points Properties Data Style Adjusted Points Properties E x ion Tuto_3 Point Collection Tuto_3 Points Data Style V Text _ Attribute Filter 123 T ype 10 E Back 123 Status 50 Normal Selected MV Display error ellipse 7 O oO O O Cancel Q Clearing Adjustment Results Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Adjust ment topic bar and then on the Clear Adjustment Results icon equivalent function on the menu bar Project gt Clear Adjustment Results GNSS Studio will then delete all the data resulting from the last run Network Adjust ment function The adjustment results will then disappear from the vari ous open documents 119 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LJ Checking Loop Closure What is a Loop closure test In a well designed survey network a number of closed loops generated by GPS vectors will exist If all observations contained zero error performing loop closures with various vectors throughout the network would result in loops with zero misclosure Since in the real world
16. Survey Post Processing To view the trajectory only click on the Design View tab Zoom in to get a better view of the trajectory EE Time view 28 Design View Survey Vie LI Step 5 Exporting Data to a File Click on the Points tab in the Workbook tbl document Then in the work book tbl document select the 2nd to 7th points To do this click once in the leftmost cell in the second row and then while holding down the Shift key click anywhere in the 7th row Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab on the Export topic bar and then on the Export Positions to File icon 56 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing In the dialog box that appears make the following two choices Export Positions to Files TOS Coordinate File CA5 CARLSON Coordinate File CAD Thales In 3 m e pa m AN Cancel Click OK A new dialog box appears asking you to choose a folder where to store the export file and name this file Select the Tuto_2 folder in the Save in field Then enter Export in the File name field Save in Tuto_2 gt me Ese Hi common txt File name export Save as type Thales YZ out txt Cancel 57 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing Click Save The end of data export is denoted by the following message in the Output pane Expor
17. AGES This written warranty is the complete final and exclusive agreement between Thales Navigation and the pur chaser with respect to the quality of performance of the goods and any and all warranties and representations This warranty sets forth all of Thales Navigation s responsibilities regarding this product This limited warranty is gov erned by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflict of law provisions or the U N Conven tion on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and shall benefit Thales Navigation its successors and assigns This warranty gives the purchaser specific rights The purchaser may have other rights which vary from locality to locality including Directive 1999 44 EC in the EC Member States and certain limitations contained in this war ranty including the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages may not apply For further information concerning this limited warranty please call or write Thales Navigation Inc 471 El Camino Real Santa Clara California 95050 Phone 1 408 615 5100 Fax 1 408 615 5200 or Thales Navigation SA ZAC La Fleuriaye BP 433 44474 Carquefou Cedex France Phone 33 0 2 28 09 38 00 Fax 33 0 2 28 09 39 39 THALES NAVIGATION PROFESSIONAL PRODUCTS LIMITED WARRANTY Europe Middle East Africa All Thales Navigation global positioning system GPS receivers are navigation aids and are not intended to replace other meth
18. LI Step 5 Field Survey Skipped This step does not fall within the scope of this manual 20 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 6 Downloading Results In this step because you are just working on an example you will be asked to copy result files from the installation CD ROM to the job folder Make sure the installation CD ROM is still in the CD ROM reader on your PC Remember however that in normal conditions of use before running this step you should connect the Z Max data collector to your office computer via a Serial line switch it on launch the FAST Survey software select the File tab the Data Transfer function and then run SurvCADD Carlson Survey Transfer m 3 m e pa m AN In the present case just do the following Run Windows Explorer Open the Samples RealTime Results folder located on the installation CD ROM Copy the 6 files present in this folder to the Job folder of the Tuto 1 project If you skipped step 4 you need to create this folder first If asked to do so overwrite some of the files already present in the folder This is at least what you should see in the job folder after copying the files lets Contents of DsSMy Projects Tuto_7 job FL My Projects a CRD File Spee Tuto 1 7 IKB FCLFile ZEB Setup Inf 16KB NOT File 30KB OBN File E Tuto_100 cbn ss 1KB System file 21 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Sur
19. O If the files are not listed in the Available Files list change the File Types o All Files on the Rinex to Ashtech tab and All Files in the Set input directory dialog box 3 The Set input directory dialog box closes The Input Directory list lists the directory path and the Available Files list lists the RINEX files in the input directory Depending upon the type of file i e Obs or Nav the Obs Nav B File and E File fields populate with suggested file names Nav g Met and S file names may also appear if the information is con tained in the Rinex file see figure below Rinex Converter Ee Eq Rines to Ashtech Ashtech to Rinex Rines File types Rines Obs files 0 Obs ASHT 311 940 Ashtech B file B_ASHA94 131 E file E ASHAs4 131 S ile 00051311 940 Nav _ASH1311 94N i Output dir D RINEXCONVERTERINOUTFOLDERS RAl C WINNTSPROFILESSPB2030 DESKTOP Use Create C Overwrite files GPS Vil Baie n ree space L Prompt for overwrite X GLONASS M Efile M S file M 246080K 265 RINEX Converter Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format 4 Click Output dir to open the Set Output directory dialog box Set Output directory 21 x Save in Sy Ashout l c Files of Type JASHTECH FILES b e s d ion Y Cancel 5 Using standard Windows navigation procedure navigate to the directory where you want to store the c
20. Studio Macro This mac ro drives GNSS Studio to format the data read from the database 301 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Q Static Survey Tutorial 3 1 Field Survey Goals in Static mode Post processing surveys are performed in the field using Thales Navigation receivers for collecting GPS raw data on the sites to be surveyed Potentially from each data block in a log file a straight GPS position can be determined for the receiver location when the data block was logged The longer the logging time the larger the number of data blocks available for the post processing phase In order to reach centimeter level accuracies for each of the points being sur veyed raw data files must be logged simultaneously in two distinct receivers One must be operated as a stationary unit at a known fixed point it is then called the station the base or the base station the other one is oper ated successively on each of the surveyed sites and is called the rover and produces a distinct observation file for each surveyed site y N Reference As each surveyed site is a single point data collecting that takes place at this point is said to be static 302 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter ls If the file logged on a surveyed point does not correspond in time to any other file logged at fixed point the best position solution that you can expect for this point will on
21. This table gathers all numeric values and processing parameters resulting from the processing you have just run Use the horizontal scroll bar to access the right hand part of the table Also click on the different tabs located at the bottom of the pane to access the various categories of results For example in this tutorial results are displayed on the follow ing tabs points files stops control positions processes vectors repeat vectors and control tie Click on the Control Tie tab to see how accurate the survey has been com pared to the MISS control point Workbook tbl Tuto_3 WGS 84 Meters a ae a PS ee eee lt gt a MISS_ Horizontal amp Vertical Control 3D N lt a 011 010 2 PaLo Horizontal amp vertical Control 3D Horizontal Fixed 2D 0 065 0 000 3o Horizontal amp Yertical Control 3D Vertical Fixed 1D 0 046 0 046 Control Positions Repeat vectors Control Tie Adiustme Ctri_Heighi Loop Closure 67 9 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network On the Time view To view this diagram click on the Time View tvw tab and resize the View pane if necessary This diagram looks like this bO014a98 273 bO008a98 273 bO005a98 273 bOO08b98 273 b1112a98 273 b1112b98 273 9 30 1998 9 30 1998 9 30 1998 9 30 1998 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 Time View ty A Survey Vie This diagram shows the impo
22. gt DZ_Residual gt Length_Resid X Tau_Test gt Adi Length_C 23 Reference From point 123 Rover To point R Start_Time Time of vector start time of occupation D Time_Span Time span of occupation 123 Solution Processed solution type X Proc_OA Quality Assurance test passed for processed solution gt Proc_DX Processed ECEF WGS84 DX component 5 gt Proc_DY Processed ECEF WGS84 DY component gt Proc_DZ Processed ECEF WGS84 DZ component gt Proc_Length Processed length ee Proc_DX_Sd Processed ECEF WGS84 DX standard deviation ea Proc_DY_Sd Processed ECEF WGS84 DY standard deviation gt Proc_DZ_Sd Processed ECEF WGS84 DZ standard deviation Processed length standard deviation Processed ECEF WGS84 DX confidence 95 Processed ECEF WGS84 DY confidence 95 Processed ECEF WGS84 DZ confidence 95 Processed length confidence 95 Processed ECEF WGS84 DX DY correlation Processed ECEF WGS84 DX 7 DZ correlation Processed ECEF WGS84 DY DZ correlation Indicates wheather vector has been processed in dyn Count of satellites during process PDOP during process Measurement type Count of records used Indicate wheather solution is to be kept for adjusment Indicated wheather this vector has been adjusted Quality Assurance test passed for adjusted solution Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DX component Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DY component Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DZ component Adjusted length Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DX standard devi
23. list El ment s 15 583 6 Ko COM1 9600 5 Verify that the destination directory in the PC pane is the project direc tory or the directory where you want the data files to be stored 6 If you want to create a new directory click anywhere on the PC pane then click the New Directory button and type a name for the directory Be sure to use logical and consistent path and file naming conventions that are easy to remember Usually it is most convenient to put the data files in the project directory 7 Select the data file s that you want to download and drag them to the PC pane To select a group of contiguous files hold the Shift key while selecting files To select particular files in the list hold down the Ctrl key while selecting files 8 Download copies the files to the PC A progress dialog box indicates the status of the download 250 Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver z Copying file Ss pa fleubOs 0r Bytes 11264 J2 done You have now reached the end of the downloading procedure Although the data files have been downloaded from the receiver they have not been delet ed from the receiver s SD card To delete receiver data files select the de sired files and click the Delete button on the toolbar The Move function copies and then deletes the files It is good practice to delete the data files in the SD card after verifying that the files have downloaded properly
24. 260200 00 VA ee PT14 m 3 m e pa m N 260400 00 a PT15 PTO x x PT2x x 260000 00 259800 00 as 200 m 310400 00 310600 00 310800 00 311000 00 311200 00 311400 E m o o This map shows the location of each surveyed point staked target verti cal flag leaning flag icon reference landmark icon non staked target leaning flag only icon The leaning flag is just to remind you that each of these points was initially planned in the project for staking out pur poses 25 2 Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 8 Performing Coordinate Calibration Zoom in on the area showing the three reference points On the Map toolbar click on and then make a multiple selection of these three points using the Shift key PT 2x On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Coordinate calibration The dialog box that opens is as follows Compute Local System x Using logged reference points Horizontal Residual Vertical Residual PT 3 30 PTS 3D PT14 SD Add Edit Remove Advanced Compute Results OF Click the Compute button to let GNSS Studio determine the local system Computation is immediate 26 Tutorials Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Residuals are displayed in the dialog box on computation completion Compute Local System l j 4 E x Using logged reference points Horizontal Residu
25. Carquefou France 33 2 28 09 38 00 Fax 33 2 28 09 39 39 Email professionalsalesemea thalesnavigation com In Germany 49 81 6564 7930 Fax 49 81 6564 7950 In Russia 7 095 956 5400 Fax 7 095 956 5360 In UK 44 870 601 0000 Fax 44 208 391 1672 In the Netherlands 31 78 61 57 988 Fax 31 78 61 52 027 Web site www thalesnavigation com
26. Design Vie Survey Vie i Precision Re 71 2 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network The map document can be printed or archived as any other type of docu ment It can even be appended to the report you will address to your cus tomer Any other map document can be created following the instructions of step 4 whenever you need to emphasize a particular aspect of a survey LI Step 5 Exporting Data to a File Inthe workbook tbl document click on the Vectors tab at the bottom and then select all the vectors listed on this tab To do this click once in the leftmost cell in the first row and then while holding down the Shift key click anywhere in the last row Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab on the Export topic bar and then on the Export Positions to File icon Inthe dialog box that appears make the following two choices Export Data to Files x ASHTECH 0 files Cancel 72 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Click OK A new dialog box appears asking you to choose a folder where to store the export file and name this file Select the Tuto 3 folder in the Save in field Then type in Ovectors bin as the file name Save int a Tuto_3 e obse bin 3 m e pa p AN File name Ovectors bir Save as type Ashtech format O File 0 Cancel Click Save The end of data export is deno
27. Foint A Control Point Hame E Description M F ENCI aner hair Click on the Process Feature Codes icon in the Workspace pane to re run the Process Feature Code function The polyline will now end at the specified point as shown in the Design View Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Creating an area To create an area from a polyline Select the end point of the polyline right click and select Properties in the pop up menu In the dialog box that opens overwrite END with CLO in the Description field and then click OK Click on the Process Feature Codes icon in the Workspace pane to re run the Process Feature Code function The polyline will now be changed into an area as shown in the Design View Q Performing Coordinate Calibration Use the Coordinate Calibration function to determine the local system after you have surveyed a number of points in the field that are in fact reference points in the local system Determining the local system is typically performed in the field but you can resume this calculation with GNSS Studio as a safety measure 7 O oO O O Select successively each of the surveyed points that are reference points in the local system and unless already done change each of them into a reference point so you can enter their known coordinates as control coor dinates On the map document make a multiple selection including all these ref ere
28. GPS is operated by the U S Government and GLONASS is the Global Navigation Satellite System of the Russian Federation which are solely responsible for the accuracy and maintenance of their systems Certain conditions can cause inaccuracies which could require modifications to the receiver Examples of such conditions include but are not limited to changes in the GPS or GLONASS transmis sion Opening dismantling or repairing of this product by anyone other than an authorized Thales Navigation Service Center will void this warranty 6 EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THALES NAVIGATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS DAMAGES RESULTING FROM DELAY OR LOSS OF USE LOSS OF OR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY EVEN THOUGH CAUSED BY NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER FAULT OFTHALES NAVIGATION OR NEGLIGENT USAGE OF THE PRODUCT IN NO EVENT WILL THALES NAVIGATION BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SUCH DAMAGES EVEN IF THALES NAVIGATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some national state or local laws do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you 7 COMPLETE AGREEMENT This written warranty is the complete final and exclusive agreement between Thales Navigation and the pur chaser wi
29. Instead target and ref erence points are made available in the form of a text file that was especially prepared for you The field survey step will be bypassed as it does not fall within the scope of this manual You will however be provided with a results file as if you had performed the field survey by yourself so that the post survey steps can be run with GNSS Studio In this survey example the base station was operated on a reference point whose coordinates are accurately known in the local system used In addi tion this installation point was chosen to offer a clear view ofthe sky for best possible GPS reception 9 2 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey 10 After surveying a couple of points that are also accurately known in the local system the field operator was able to perform an in the field calibration al lowing her him to refine the parameters of the local system used and after wards to survey all the other points with the same level of precision as the known points With GNSS Studio you will be able to re run this calibration at the office for safety or cross checking purposes This tutorial is also valid for those of you who prefer to work with the base station operated on an unknown point In this case however the calibration is essential not to say vital as it brings about a significant leap in the precision from a few meters due to floating base station position determined in Autonomous GPS mod
30. Map View in which the graphic representation of the imported vector file has just been saved Note that this background map project is now the currently active project in the workspace its name appears in bold characters Later on when you want to change the active project just select Project gt Set Active Project on the GNSS Studio menu bar and check the name of the project you wish to make active For the moment keep the Background Map project the active project 33 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 13 Importing a Raster Image In this step you will have to use the GNSS Studio installation CD ROM that you have already inserted in the computer s CD drive 34 I Selecting a Raster Image for Import In the Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Import topic bar and then on the Import Raster Image icon This causes the Browse dialog box to appear From the Look in combo box select the following folder on the GNSS Studio CD ROM Samples Maps Raster ki Supported formats BMP DIB PCX JPG JPEG TGA TIF Select the file stored in this folder and click Open A new dialog box opens showing part of the map stored in the JPG file which is to become a collection in the background map project Click L to reduce the size of this window Raster Layer Map name ox Cancel Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey As this map is dimensionless you need to g
31. Otherwise the memory may fill up dur ing the next data collection session resulting in the inability to complete the survey 4 251 7 Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver 252 SurvCom Utility Launching SurvCom Chapter 8 SurvCom Utility Launching SurvCom SurvCom allows you to exchange data between the office PC and the Z Max data collector This utility is available from the Thales Navigation program list as a separate program It will also be automatically launched from within GNSS Studio when you select one of the following commands Upload Positions to External Device provided you then select Z Max data collector as the external device connected to the PC Download Positions from External Device provided you then choose real time results as the data to be downloaded and you select Z Max data collector as the external device connected to the PC If the communications parameters are set correctly a connection will be made and the directory listing from the Z Max will be retrieved Transfer in progress Please Wait is Retrieving directory listing N lt 253 SurvCom Utility Launching SurvCom If on the contrary the parameters are incorrect the following two dialog box es will appear one after the other Transfer in progress Please Wait Connecting to remote system s ERROR x Communications Failure Ifa connec
32. Serial Port Comm Coml Speed 3600 Data bits le Parity None s Stop bits fi cancel T Skip this dialog if no error occurs First make sure the 6000 or 6500 receiver is connected to the office PC via one of its serial port After setting the PC port involved in the data transfer in the above dialog box click OK to upload the geoid data to the receiver Geoids Utility Importing a New Geoid Model Importing a New Geoid Model This function allows you to update any geoid model whose data format is known Geoids will convert any type of file you import into a binary file with GEO extension Select File gt lmport A dialog box opens allowing you to specify the loca tion of the original file containing the new geoid its format the name of the GEO file that will result from the import operation and a comment associated with the imported geoid model Click on the Import button to import the selected geoid model Example of Import dialog box Geoid Import x File ommon Files Gnss Geoids El Format Mame Geoid Comment Import Cancel 241 Geoids Utility Displaying the Versions of the Available Geoid Formats Displaying the Versions of the Available Geoid Formats Select Help gt About Geoids A dialog box opens listing the versions of the DLL files corresponding to the available geoid models Dialog box showing the available geoid models Geoids Version
33. Surveyed ellipsoid height Surveyed orthometric height Surveyed easting standard deviation Surveyed northing standard deviation Surveyed height standard deviation Surveyed easting confidence 95 Surveyed northing confidence 95 Surveyed horizontal confidence 95 Surveyed height confidence 95 Surveyed easthing northing correlation Surveyed easthing height correlation Surveyed northing 7 height correlation Grid convergence angle for this point Grid scale factor for this point Distance reducing factor to the surface of the ellipsoid Distance between P1 and P rm Distance between P2 and P rm Lateral offset side Indicates there are warnings check Message for more System message LI Vectors Collection Appendices Database in a Land Survey Project Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D line expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following classic attributes 23 gt Proc_Length_ ee Proc_DX_Conf 93 gt Proc_DY_Conf ee Proc_DZ2_Cont 03 gt Proc_Length_ 123 Proc_DxY_Cor 123 Proc_DX2_Corr 123 Proc_DYZ_Corr X Dynamic 123 SVs 23 PDOP 123 Meas_Type 123 Epochs X Enabled X Adjusted X Ad OA gt Adi DX gt Adi DY gt Adi DZ gt Adi Lenath gt Adi DX_Sd 29 Adi DY_Sd 29 Adi DZ_Sd gt Adi Length_Sd 29 Adi DX_Cont 2 gt Adi DY_Conf 2 gt Adi DZ_Cont 123 Adj_DXY_Cor 23 Adj DX2Z_Cor 23 Adj DYZ_Corr gt DX_Residual 2 gt DY_Residual
34. The first attribute in this list will appear in the first column and so on 171 Reference Working in a Table Document When you are done with the attributes of the Pt tab click OK to return to the Tab tab in the Table Properties dialog box To create a new tab click ja and then resume the previous 6 steps Once you have defined all your tabs click OK to close the Table Properties dialog box Your new table document is then updated to reflect all the changes made Note that GNSS Studio has automatically filled in the tables using the relevant data from the project database Q Removing an Attribute from a Table Document Temporary removal On the menu bar select Table gt Data This opens the Table Properties dialog box In the list of attributes clear the check button opposite the name of the attribute to temporarily remove it from the table Click OK This removes the selected column from the table To re enable this attribute in the table document re check this button Normal removal 172 On the menu bar select Table gt Data This opens the Table Properties dialog box In the list of attributes select the attribute you want to remove from the table document Click x This deletes the attribute from the list Click OK This removes the corresponding column from the table Reference Working in a Table Document Q Setting a Filter on an Attribute Setting filters on attributes allows you to list on
35. To Import and Process Single Sites To Import and Process Baselines To Import Process and Adjust This enables GNSS Studio to import the files and then automatically pro cess the baselines and adjust the network using the two fixed control points PALO and J886 At the end of the processing phase GNSS Studio shows the results of the processing These results are detailed in the next step 65 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Q Step 3 Analyzing the project content after Download On the map J d D ei S000 m 00 000001 22 10 00 0000 122 05 0 000001 22 O0 00 00009121 55 00 00 SZ Time View t i Design vie iii Survey Vie The vectors determined by GNSS Studio are shown as green red seg ments depending on whether they respectively passed or failed the QA test here they are all green The size and shape of the error ellipse as well as the vertical error a vertical segment for each vector are repre sented at mid distance along the vector Please refer to the legend shown in the lower right on the map to assess the error ellipse and the vertical error attached to each vector The location of each control point is represented by a dark blue triangle The name of this point is displayed next to it The letters H and or V by the triangle icon indicate that the control point has been fixed horizon tally and or vertically The loc
36. absolutely perfect survey observations are impossible loops will generate some level of misclosure Misclosures due to random errors in the observations should be of predict able magnitude 1 e a magnitude similar to the measurement accuracy of the instrument used Misclosures due to blunders are unpredictable in magnitude ranging in size based on the size of the blunder Due to this loop closures can be an effective method to isolate blunders in the data set When a large blunder or multiple blunders exist in a data set it is sometimes difficult to find the blunder s from analysis of the adjustment output This is due to the tendency of least squares adjustments to distribute the error from these blunders throughout the survey network In such cases loop closures can be an effective tool to assist in isolating the blunders By performing multiple loop closures in the area where a blunder s is suspected to exist the vector s causing the blunder s can normally be isolated Once the problem vector s is isolated it can be examined and repaired or removed GNSS Studio supplies the tools for you to perform a loop closure analysis of the survey network to assist in isolating blunders By selecting vectors you can create multiple loops throughout the network The results of each loop closure are presented for analysis 120 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project How to run a loop closure test Select at least three vectors fo
37. by any of the files delivered by this provider Enter this time in minutes Ask your provider or consult its website if you do not know this value OBS Files Internet Download needs to know where the files are stored on the provider s website and how they are named You should then enter the path to files example pub gps rawdata followed by the syntax used in the filenames The button located on the right of this field allows you enter this syntax in a more friendly way Ask your provider or con sult its website if you do not know the path and the syntax of filenames NAV files Same as OBS files field above You will not have to complete this field if the provider is a precise orbit files provider Comment Enter your personal notes regarding the provider optional More Info For example use this field to enter the address of a particular page on the provider s web site Public Restricted Access radio buttons Choose the appropriate option If you check Restricted Access then you will have to enter a username and a password in the next two fields Login If you have checked Restricted Access enter the username normally supplied by the provider to access his specified website Password If you have checked Restricted Access enter the password nor mally supplied by the provider to access his specified website os o Fer oS Se Ou 291 1 1 Internet Download Adding new Providers t
38. log box by clicking OK This enables communications between the com puter and the GPS receiver and allows you to use any of the WinComm functions O Z 219 WinComm Utility Enabling communications with a GPS receiver LI Receiver Type After communication is successfully established e g using the Auto Config ure button the identification of the connected receiver appears in this box The example below results from a communication established with a Thales Navigation receiver Receiver Type GNSS TOOOLARURF YT 0300 CMOS CMP YBOO20410 CM0e CMBLO0000265 After the Communication Settings dialog box is closed you can ask for the re ceiver type by sending the TEST 1 or IDENT command to the connected re ceiver using the Command pane LI Load settings button Load settings opens a dialog box that allows you to select any serial port con figuration file saved earlier using the Save Settings button Click the desired file name in the list box to select it typically in the set di rectory and click Open As a result the serial port parameters in the Commu nication Settings dialog box are automatically set as specified in the file you selected Clicking Cancel would take you back to the Communication Settings dialog box 220 WinComm Utility Enabling communications with a GPS receiver LI Save settings button Save settings opens a dialog box that allows you to save the serial port c
39. numeric geometric Collection n a Object 1 Attributes Object 1 text numeric geometric Attributes Object n text numeric geometric Maps Attribute tables Reports Project 2 Graphs Time view etc 76 Reference Introduction Workspace Contains one or more projects of the same type or of different types Any project created previously from another workspace can be insert ed into the open workspace for the sole purpose of being seen from within this workspace Project Two types Land Survey and Background Map Two tabs are used in the workspace pane to show the content of a project Collections and Doc uments Another tab the Commands tab is also present in this pane Commands Tab designed to help you choose the right command at the right time see next page Collections Each collection contains a number of objects Each object is de fined by a list of attributes plus a geometric attribute defining the location of the object on the surface of the Earth Documents Five possible types map attribute table time view report and graph Documents are created to show the content of the project database from a selected visual format 7 O oO O The open workspace and the projects it contains are shown in the left hand pane of GNSS Studio Example of workspace Workspace name i Tuto_2 documents Projects present in Fils BckGindM
40. 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 4 Click OK The Format Header edit box now contains the following informa 154 tion m Format Header z Project 12 Surveyors t You can change the formatting parameters by selecting them directly from within this edit box ki The Width parameter you have just defined is located just after the field name within the square brackets and is separated from the name by the sym bol If you could have defined a number of decimal places for this field this number would have been inserted just after the Width parameter also separated from 39 this parameter bya Example SdZ 8 2 means that the SdZ numeric field will occupy a total of 8 characters 2 of which will be dedicated to the fractional part If the field value fits in less than 8 characters then leading spaces will be inserted to fill the field The decimal point occupies one character If you now select another field from the Field Selection list box and you click on the Insert instead of the Insert button then the field will be directly inserted into the Format Header edit box keeping the same format ting instructions if applicable as the ones you have defined previously for the Project field Reference Working in a Background Map Project 6 In the Format Header edit box you can also create a new line by inserting a carriage return to type text dir
41. 7 10 DLL formats version pm Copyright C 2000 2003 THALES Navigation Deleting a geoid model Select File gt Open A dialog box opens allowing you to specify which geoid model should be deleted a complete or partial one Click Delete The geoid file is deleted after user confirmation 242 Download Utility Introduction Chapter 7 Download Utility Introduction J z z pa This module is used to download data from the SD card installed in the Z Max receiver or from the SD card inserted in the local SD card reader or from a ProMark2 or directly from the PC hard disk The SD card contains data logged during your field surveys Download should not be confused with the Import Data from Files command from the Project menu in GNSS Studio This last command can only import pre converted data files ready for processing whereas the Download mod ule is used to download AND convert the raw data files that come direct from the field and that need to be split up into several files before GNSS Studio can process them You can download data files to a project only after opening this project which means you must create the project first As explained above data files are located either on an SD card still present in the Z Max or an SD card in serted in the local SD card reader or on your PC hard disk if previously downloaded from the receiver To add data files to the project from the land
42. AN Q Step 3 Analyzing the Content of the Project This step gives us the opportunity to introduce the different parts that can be seen in the GNSS Studio main window see window example on the next page The Workspace pane 1 shows the content of the Commands tab This tab is designed to help you choose the right command at the right time The available commands are organized by topic and are in fact those accessible from the menu bar but here they are shown as large icons with command names displayed underneath The number of topics contained in the tab is context sensitive To open a topic when several topics are available click the horizontal topic bar showing the name of the topic In this tutorial you will be prompted to work with these large icons rather than use the commands from the Project menu on the GNSS Studio menu bar You can however use the Project menu if you prefer The Workspace pane contains two more tabs that you can select in the lower part of the pane The Collections tab shows the structure of the project database The Documents tab lists the documents created in the project At this stage this tab only lists default documents 15 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey The View pane 2 is a display area shared by all the documents open in the project Several types of documents can be created in a project map table time view report and graph 178 foal 5urwey ewe Tubo i FRA ae Laminer
43. Ignore flagged residuals Examine error of problem point s If close to accuracy specification may be able to ignore If not close do not Fail hold fixed problem control point s if OK with client Control Tie Analysis Constrained Adjustment 314 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Blunder Detection Tools The blunder detection tools are designed to assist you in detecting problems with an adjustment The tools assist in determining if blunders exist in any of the observations used in the adjustment or if any problems exist in the net work construction that would hamper the ability for an adjustment to be per formed Each tool is presented in detail below gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Q Network Connectivity Test In order to properly adjust an entire data set of observations there must be connectivity between all sections of the data set For example look at a sur vey of a pipeline that will require multiple days of work to complete Two survey crews begin work on the project one on the north end and one on the south end At the end of day 1 each crew will have surveyed a number of points at each end of the project The two data sets have no observations be tween them yet These two data sets cannot be adjusted together because they are not connected The network connectivity test examines the data set prior to adjustment to de ter
44. Ordered by es As Mew lines o Hame f Description OoOo Layer Comment 7 O oO O Cancel In the As New field indicate whether you want to create a line or an area from the selected points In the Name field enter a name for this line or area Complete the other fields as necessary Click OK to create the new line or area and close this dialog box Deleting a line or an area does not delete the points making up this line or area In other words the Delete function applied to a line or an area amounts to ungrouping the points making up this line or area Incidentally this is the reason why the Ungroup function does not exist in GNSS Studio 131 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Q Editing the definition of a collection To list the attributes characterizing any of the objects present in a collection do the following Inthe Workspace pane on the Collections tab select any collection by clicking on its name for example click on Points Right click on the selected collection select Properties on the popup menu or double click directly on the collection The two tabs below show the attributes of a point object general case i Attributes Location SSS aes eg Name Description Ate Name Point name Geometry Type 123 Type Point type X Point Description Feature code Pie Layer Layer name Coordinates Dimension t Comment Free notes 123 C
45. Overwrite Toggle whether or not you want SurvCom to have you confirm overwriting of files 258 SurvCom Utility Commands Available Confirm Delete Toggle whether or not you want SurvCom to have you confirm deleting of files and directories Baud Rate You must choose the baud rate for transferring data 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 Protect Remote Files Toggle whether or not you want to protect files on the mobile device 2j Set Geoid button This command will prompt you to select a directory with Geoid 99 EGM 96 or CGG2000 grids and enter the longitude and latitude near the center of your job N lt a 5 Set Geoid Area Geoid Grid Files Dir C elect 0 Geoid 99 C EGM 96 Canadian CGG 2000 Enter Lat Lon near center of job Latitude dd rms oo Longitude dd mmss CE mw Grid size Qo C miles km deg Grid Name oeio OF Cancel 259 SurvCom Utility Commands Available F2F Conv F2F Conv button This command will copy a field to finish file FLD to the data collector and convert it to the FCL format used by the FAST Survey field soft ware A Exit button This command will exit SurvCom 260 RINEX Converter Preliminary Operations Chapter 9 RINEX Converter RINEX Receiver Ndependent EXchange is a standard format for GPS GLONASS or GPS GLONASS data supported throughout the industry The RINEX Converter utility provides a mean
46. This tab allows you to choose The Spatial Reference System Coordinate system to be used as default sys tem for the entire project Make this choice by selecting a system from the list displayed in the Spatial Reference System drop down menu The E button located next to this field allows you to edit the selected coordinate system The choice of a Spatial Reference System or coordinate system is very important Refer to Creating a Projected System on page 84 for more explanations on how to select a coordinate system that is absent from the list attached to this field and how you can create a new system The Time zone Time zone corresponding to the geographical location of the working area 95 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Linear unit The linear distance unit meters US feet or Int feet for the entire project Tuto_2 Project Settings q x Region Miscellaneous Feature Code List Spatial Reference System A O BGS 8 J Time zone GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris Linear unit All distances in Meters N The Save As Defaults button allows you to save the current settings in this dialog box as the default settings for any new project that you will create later on 96 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 2 Project Settings Miscellaneous tab This tab contains the four data subsets described below Tuto_2 Project S
47. To Apply and Process if you also want GNSS Studio to re process the feature codes to build objects lines or areas During this processing step the Layer parameter in the properties of each of the selected points see also Editing a Point on page 138 will be updated to match the feature code specifications as read from the feature code list LI Processing Feature Codes This function allows GNSS Studio to draw lines and create areas between the different points to which you have previously assigned feature codes You do not need to select anything in your project GNSS Studio will analyze all the feature codes assigned to your points and will automatically draw lines areas between the concerned points 123 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project To run this function click on the CAD topic bar and then on the Process Feature Codes icon For a given set of points defined with the same line feature code GNSS Studio will always draw lines from the oldest to the newest point and so the program will ignore the order in which you may have selected these points before running the function Ending a line To end a line at a given point 124 Select this point in the Design View right click and select Properties in the pop up menu In the dialog box that opens type in END in the Description field after the already present string see example below don t forget the space before END and then click OK
48. box Click the Browse button This opens a dialog box that prompts all the directories existing on your disk Open by double clicking the directory containing WinComm Click WinComm exe and click the Open button or simply double click Win Comm exe This closes the Browse dialog box and automatically enters WinComm exe with its path into the Command line text box in the Create Shortcut dialog box In the Command line text box enter the name of your configuration file after WinComm exe with a space between WinComm exe and the file name Click the Next button Enter a name for your shortcut icon Click the Fin ish button This closes the Create Shortcut dialog box As aresult anew WinComm icon appears in the workspace with the name you specified 234 Geoids Utility Introduction Chapter 6 Geoids Utility Introduction Geoids allows the following Importing new geoid models Extracting data from a geoid model in order to create a smaller file just describing the specified region Loading a geoid model either partially or completely into a Thales Nav igation receiver Extracting and loading geoid data can be performed in a single operation Reading the geoid currently used in a receiver The following formats exist in Geoids EGM96 GEOIDYY GGF97 GGR9I9I GRD GSD95 RAF Opening a Geoid Model Select File gt Open A dialog box opens in which you can choose a geoid model amo
49. brst0130 04d 2 Ok Searching for file pub gps gpsdata brdc 2004 brdc0130 04n Z Ok Downloading File pub gps gpsdata 04013 04d brst0130 04d 2Z Ok Downloading File pub gps gpsdata brdc 2004 brdc0130 04n Z Ok Disconnecting Ok Uncompressing Observation file s Ok Merging Observation data to brst0131 040 Ok Uncompressing Navigation file s Ok Merging Navigation data to brst0131 04n Ok 288 Internet Download Using Internet Download Note the different operations performed during this phase e Internet Download connects to the Provider s web address e Provider then searches for and then download the corresponding files to the specified folder e Disconnection from Provider s web address e Internet Download locally uncompresses and merges the observa tion files e Internet Download then locally uncompresses and merges the navi gation files Below is another example of messages read in the output pane when downloading orbit data Connecting to Host cddisa gsfc nasa gov Ok Searching for file pub gps products 1253 igr12532 sp3 Z Ok Downloading File pub gps products 1253 igr12532 sp3 Z Ok Disconnecting Ok Close button Click on this button to quit Internet Download os o Fer oS Se Ou 289 11 Internet Download Adding new Providers to the Existing List of Providers Adding new Providers to the Existing List of Providers You can freely complete
50. deleted if this trajectory already exists in the Lines collection A certain number n of optimized floating or fixed solutions are com puted for all epochs for which GPS measurements are available The n solutions are saved as n objects in the Points collection The n points are linked to form the trajectory Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter An object is created in the Lines collection It is named like the site from which it proceeds The set of n points making up the trajectory is then defined as the geometric attribute of the new object If however the tra jectory already exists in the collection its geometric attribute is updated with the set of n points computed The object from the Points collection involved in this processing is updated as the start point of the trajectory gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN If the Stop amp Go mode is selected the following processing steps are run in GNSS Studio The ultimate results are stored in the Points collection The vectors resulting from the above processing are built They are ori ented from the reference to the computed points New objects are created in the Vectors collection showing how the vec tors are built The vectors are identified by the two points from which they proceed plus a start time and therefore have no proper names k Unlike the processing of a trajectory no object is created in the Lines collec tion and no
51. from this list not from the list of pre defined systems Conversely a sys tem you have created yourself will be definitively deleted from the coordinate system library if you delete it 89 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Import a coordinate system from a file in csl format click E select the file to be imported from the folder you choose and then click Open The imported system will appear in the list of coordinate sys tems Files in csl format are ASCII files that can be uploaded to the data collector Export the selected system to a file in csl format click EC after selecting the coordinate system you want to export Specify the tar get folder and click Save Working in a Land Survey Project Q 90 Overview 1 Viewing surveys on maps When creating a new land survey project GNSS Studio automatically cre ates default documents among which is a document showing a map of the working area Survey View document This document is displayed in the View pane Below is a map example showing two points and a baseline CH an Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Two viewing options exist for the map itself With without grid The grid is defined as a network of horizontal and vertical lines drawn at regular intervals of distance along the North amp East axes With without ruler The ruler is defined as the set of coordinate values associated with the grid There may be as many m
52. in the field whose theoretical coor dinates are known in the local system and that will be surveyed for cali bration purposes Target point A point whose theoretical coordinates known in the local system are provided for staking out purposes Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Points are represented as follows in every Point Properties dialog box that you open see icon column To open a Point Properties dialog box double click any point on the active map document or in the active table document listing points click in the leftmost column of a row right click and select Properties Tyve Control Coordinates Survey Coordinates Error yP Expressed on Expressed on Report 1 x Intermediate poin Project s system ES Control point Project s system Project s system yes EJ ene oe before surve y Local system Reference point s Target point 7 z7 before survey Target point after opal sysiem survey NA Not Applicable 1 Where applicable GNSS Studio calculates the deviations between the theo retical and surveyed coordinates 2 Only if the coordinate system used in the project is a projected system k As the control coordinates of control points are expressed in the projects sys tem they are automatically transformed if you change the project 8 system 129 7 O oO O 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project k As the control coordinates of target and reference point
53. intermediate points are stored in the Points collection 4 Dynamic or Stop amp Go Survey Scheme Ist step Field Survey Assuming the following survey example 1 reference point on which a base station logs raw data for about 30 minutes 299 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Another receiver a rover is moved along a trajectory wile logging raw data The two logging sequences take place at the same time Raw Data Logging Trajecto At Ref Along Trajectory _ 7X Y Reference Created files trajlog bin Reflog bin 2nd step Creating a new land survey project with GNSS Studio Use the File gt New command to create a land survey project and a workspace 3rd step Importing raw data file into the project database Use the Project gt Import Raw Data command to import the files logged in the field trajlog bin Reflog bin Don t forget to select the Dynamic check box before importing trajlog bin this will automatically set the processing of the resulting baseline to Dynamic or Stop amp Go if files contain stop events The fol lowing is then performed in the project database Inthe Files collection a new object is created for each imported file Inthe Points collection a new object is created for each imported file or is updated if the object already exists See Internal Processing Tied to Raw Data Import on page 296 Footnote 3 for the description of the site created for the rover
54. like the recorder to run after the above one This requires good knowledge of the different commands possible as well as their syntax You can save your lists of commands as a BAT file using the Save button and load them quickly later on using the Load button Then click on the OK button to start the data recording The data recording will take place until you click on the Stop Recording button this button is in fact the Start Recording button which is renamed once data recording is in progress 228 WinComm Utility Programmable GPS recorder Programmable GPS recorder The Programmable GPS Recorder option allows you to prepare one or more re quests for recording the data output on the connected receiver port by spec ifying a start date time and duration for each planned recording session and also a disk file name directory and maximum size You can save the recording session requests you prepare using the Save but ton so that you can load them back at a later date using the Load button Programable Gps Recorder Editing lt Directory c program files gnss studio ra L FileName 05301640 Pa File Max Size NoLimits Start Date may 30 2001 Start Time 16h40m46 0s Duration thOmO0s W Automatic File Name Ww x Add Request Delete Request Run Prograrn Load Program Save Program Print Program Directory Used to specify the directory to which y
55. may take a while Sy Download gt PC Jol x Fichier Edition Affichage R cepteur Aide GF eq es ge Ba Be XK aw EE Soa New ire Mowe t E operations S Fichiers Donn es tbl BA Erreurs tbl E Fichiers Stops tbl QA Positions de contr le tbl Objets Lignes tbl Tuto_2 LSP E r S Objets Points tbl Vecteurs Ajust s tbl Objets Surfaces tbl Vecteurs Mesur s tbl gt Pr paration du listage El ment s 15 583 6 Ko cOM1 9600 YW 249 7 Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver After system mounting the left pane lists the files contained in the SD card Note that the listed U file names comply with the file naming con ventions defined for files present in the SD card except for the leading U letter which is replaced here with a globe icon with a G for Geo detic inside the globe 5 Download gt PC Eel Xx Fichier Edition Affichage R cepteur Aide oo ey S fa Ba X Oe Op rations tbl 27 05 03 Z Fichiers Donn es tbl Z QA Erreurs tbl E 1922 73 727 27 05 03 Fichiers Stops tbl QA Positions de co G 2505 42143 27 05 03 Objets Lignes tbl Tuto_2 LSP abex 34017 27 05 03 Objets Points tbl Vecteurs Ajust s tl ee thalb 3821 27 05 03 Objets Surfaces tbl Vecteurs Mesur s gt Le R pertoire a t
56. objects in a given order Note that the default workbook tbl document is a table document provid ing an exhaustive view of all the data pertaining to your project LI Creating a Table Document in an Open Project Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Project topic bar and then on the Create New Document icon This opens the New dialog box On the Documents tab select Table from the list Name the new docu ment by typing a name in the File Name field For example type in Table1 Keep the other default choices Active project prompted in the Add to project field Blank Folder field means that the document will be saved in the active project folder Click OK A new blank table document opens on the View pane The table consists of a single tab named sheet 1 tab located at the bottom of the table document To define the sheet 1 tab content and rename it select Table gt Tabs from the menu bar 7 O oO O 169 3 Reference Working in a Table Document Unless already done select Sheet 1 in the list Table Properties x Tab View Click This displays the Data tab in the Table Properties dialog box Click El opposite the Collections field to select the collection from which you are going to define the content of this tab For example choose Points and click OK Inthe Alias field underneath type a
57. of 0 03m on a 10 kilometer baseline A residual 2 3 times larger than this allowable error is suspect and should be examined closely for the possible presence of a blunder Sometimes the size of a residual will be border line as to whether or not a blunder exists If this is the case the observation should be inspected closely to see if the cause of the blunder can be determined If not it is a judgement call as to whether or not the observation should be removed If the observation is not critical to the strength of the network it can be removed without impact If the observation is needed but does not seem to have an adverse affect on the accuracy of the adjusted points it can be left in Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Q Tau Test Examining residuals is a good indicator of the quality of individual observa tions As stated earlier the expected value of residuals are predictable since they are expected to follow a normal distribution gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN The Tau test utilizes this predictability to automatically test the residuals of an observation to determine if the residuals could represent an observation containing a blunder The Tau test utilizes the normalized residuals for an ob servation to determine if statistically the residual is within expected limits A threshold value is computed to test each normalized residual against Each normalized residual is tested with two possible outcomes
58. on SI or on the menu bar select Edit gt Epoch and select the follow ing in the dialog box that opens Date Select month year and date of prediction From Enter start time of prediction To Enter end time Click OK to complete the definition Dialog box allowing you to define the date amp time of prediction Prediction Epoch gt 577 Sse RS 3h Om Os orea 191 Mission Planning Utility Defining a moment within the prediction Defining a moment within the prediction You can define a particular moment within the prediction time span Click on or on the menu bar select Edit gt Cur Time Inthe lower right corner specify the interesting moment in hours min utes seconds Click OK to complete the definition 192 Dialog box allowing you to define a particular moment within the predic tion Current Time Date June 20m k This particular moment in the prediction can be shifted graphically on any prediction view See Redefining a specific moment in the prediction on page 204 Mission Planning Utility Defining the local UTC time deviation Defining the local UTC time deviation This deviation identifies the time zone in which the observation point is lo cated To change this deviation On the menu bar select Edit gt Time Zone Select the working area in the Zone field You can also enter a deviation expressed in hours minutes and seconds by sel
59. only apply to table or graph documents This is the reason why you cannot select a geocentric system at project level To create a new geocentric system Run the Tools gt Coordinate Systems command Click E check the Define a NEW GEOCENTRIC system option and click the Next button Complete the two screens allowing the definition of a geocentric system Defining a geocentric system is much like defining a geographic system except that you do not have to define a vertical datum 88 Reference Coordinate Systems Q Managing Coordinate Systems On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Tools gt Coordinate Systems The dia log box that opens looks like the one below Coordinate Systems Iofs iF Local TSwGs g4 The content of this dialog box determines the list of coordinate systems attached to the Spatial Reference System field on the Region tab of the Project Settings dialog box or on the View tab of any Map or Table Properties dialog box The following functions can be performed from this box 7 O oO O O Edit the properties of a system select this system and click E Add anew coordinate system to this list click choose the type of coordinate system you want to define and then define this system or simply select it from the list of pre defined systems Delete a coordinate system from the list click IX after highlighting a system in the list You can only delete a pre defined system
60. ori ents each baseline described in the scenario in such a way that the first point mentioned is more likely than the other to be a reference point 113 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 114 The probability is all the more important as the point is held fixed by the user is involved in a large number of baselines and is associated with a long observation In addition GNSS Studio lists the processes in logical order after deter mining which priority should be given to each process some of them being dependent on the results provided by some others However you are allowed to freely change the scenario if you think it should be different from what is suggested by GNSS Studio You can for example Move a process up or down by clicking E or El after selecting the corresponding row Delete a process by clicking X after selecting the corresponding row Invert the orientation of a baseline by clicking after selecting the corresponding row Change the definition of a process by editing any cell in the corre sponding row For example you can change the processing mode static dynamic the elevation mask angle or the type of orbit data to be used in the processing You can also intentionally reject L2 measurements or some satellites from the processing or even pre vent the use of some satellites as reference satellites Finally you can create a mask to be placed over the observation file Refere
61. planned position of each of these satellites for the chosen moment The view uses polar coordi nates Center of concentric circles location of observation point From center to larger circle elevation angle from 90 to 0 respectively each new circle represents 10 in elevation The angular space between any two adjacent lines represents 30 in azi muth graduated clockwise from 0 to 360 Example of Polar view Azimuth f elevation Predicted S s Azimuth Elevation At Site Biante 43 20 59 DOO0 N 134 5 0000 2 022 m From jun 6 2007 9h Om Os To jun 6 2007 12h Orn Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ev Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored On jun 6 2007 9h Om Os GDOP 304 T 2 2 Gy Az Ew 300 an my 77 So 5S ga 3 305 3 631 15 5 5 541 17 485 336 18 97 0 385 9 29 0 20 3270 71 1444 322 22 185 1 66 5 23 7935 370 a aie a2 i 2 yago z233 AU 73 285 9 259 201 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results Q GDOP view This view shows the variations of the selected DOP as a function of the fix computation envisaged on the observation point To select which DOP parameter to plot Select Options gt DOP gt Parameter Name The possible choices are GDOP Geometric Dilution Of Precision PDOP Position Dilution Of Precision HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision WVDOP Vertical Dilution Of Precision TDOP Time Dilution Of Precision Define the ty
62. shows the properties of the raw data files you want to import on top You can also right now define the control point and enter the true coordi nates of this point at the bottom Click in the Name cell located underneath the Control Points header A down arrow then appears in this cell Click on this down arrow and then from the drop down list that appears select the point you want to use as the control point Here you can only select 0001 as this is the only point that can logically be defined as a control point m 3 m e pa m AN Importing GPS Data oj x Raw Data SH ec SSS ee January 261996 08 12 35 0 Iv January 261996 08 03 40 0 D 0 000 Vertical 0 000 Vertical BKINMAS6 0001 gt BKINMAS6 026 B0001 496 026 Hame Long 95 Err Lat 95 Err Height 95 Err Control Fixed lt OOOO Add Raw Data OK v Cancel 49 50 2 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing Click inside the next cell or press the Tab key This causes the other cells in this row to show all the properties of the newly chosen control point as deduced from one of the data files you want to import Control Points x gt 0001 37 13 24 52163 E 0 000 56 01 39 96045 N 0 000 271 905 0 000 Hor amp Ver Hor amp Yer Enter the true Lat Lon coordinates of the 0001 point see
63. tab The Miscellaneous tab is used to set a number of parameters regarding blunder detection network adjustment quality control and precise orbit data Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Insert Project Into Worksp Allows you to add a project from another work space to the currently open workspace In fact it is still the same single project but seen from another workspace If for example you make changes to this project these changes will also appear when you open this project in the original workspace GNSS Studio can only open a sin gle workspace at a time gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq DRM LJ Project Menu Background Project Context Background Map Project active Set Active Project Allows you to choose which project must be active you have to make this choice if there is more than one project in the work space Import Vector Layers Allows you to import ESRI files as new collections in the project database Import Raster Layers Allows you to import bitmap BMP files as new col lections in the project database Edit Settings Opens the Project Settings dialog box containing a single tab the Region tab on which you can define the project s coordinate sys tem and the time zone Insert Project Into Worksp Allows you to add a project from another work space to the currently open workspace In fact it is still the same single project but seen from another workspace If for example you make c
64. the data was Time recorded in UTC time 24 hour time scale M is the minute of the hour the data was recorded in UTC time S is the second of the minute the data was recorded in UTC time Pressure mbs The recorded barometric pressure of the atmosphere in millibars Dry Temp C The recorded temperature of the air not corrected for humidity in ene degrees Celsius Rel Hum The recorded relative humidity of the air in percent ZWET mm Zenith Wet Tropospheric Delay in millimeters default 0 18 Click OK to accept the meteorological data and close the Edit dialog box 19 Click Save to save the changes made to the Met tab and close the Additional info for selected files dialog box The Apply button saves any changes made to the active tab and does not close the Additional info for selected files dialog box The Save button saves any changes made any tab and closes the Additional info for selected files dialog box 20 Click Begin to convert the selected Ashtech files to RINEX format The Conversion Status dialog box opens see figure below showing the status of the conversion process Upon completion the dialog box indicates 100 for each file 279 RINEX Converter Batch Processing Conversion status mai complete Obs file 00010261 960 F Nav file 00010261 96N i Nava file 00010261 96G a Met file Comments Input files D ASHSOLS PROJECT S KINM B0001496 026 D ASHSOLSPROJECT S KINM
65. the file hen you are ready click on the Go button to convert the input file heck this button to name output files according to RINEX conventions Then choose anually the file index from 0 to 9 in the combo box which then appears on the right RINEX OUTPUT FILES Observation File C MY PROJECTS RAWDATASSITE3190 010 i Navigation File JC M Y PROJECTS RAWDATASSITES190 01N Lal d MV Automatic naming according to RINEX conventions File Index o 1st session of day O fist session of day Advanced Tr Ts 10 ms using instantaneous dopplers 283 1 DTR Utility Using DTR LI Advanced options This window is displayed after clicking on the Advanced button in the main window It is used to define precisely in which way time labeling is changed from satellite to receiver time Advanced Options x Extrapolate satellite dated raw data transmitted at satellite time Ts Using smoothed doppler measurements Upto reception time Tr Ts Tx Where Tx 1100 v ms I Compute positions using smoothed C A code pseudoranges Write a log file with all intermediate results Save s Defaults Cancel For a standard conversion use instantaneous dopplers and Tx 0 To optimize further processing of files in RINEX format originating exclu sively from DSNP log files use Tx 75 ms preferably In addition to opti mize static processing choose filtered do
66. the following selections Layer Wizard Style E a i X do HMHE E M Back CI M Symbol logged pointico che rece eos Normal Selected lt Back Cancel 69 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Click the Finish button The map document should now look like this af 30 O0 Q0000 N 37 25 00 00000 N af 20 OO Q0000 H S000 m T 00 0000 1 22 10 00 0000 22 05 00 0000 1 22 00 00 0000 21 55 00 0 Z Time Wiew t m Design Wie m Survey Wie 4 Precision Re Right click anywhere on the map document and select Legend The Map Properties dialog box opens On the Legend tab click i then select Points in the list of collections and then click OK Click the Next button In the Layer Wizard Style dialog box that appears make the following selections 70 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Layer Wizard Style E g x E M Back W Symbol flogged paint ico m 3 m e pa m AN Normal Selected T Display error ellipse Back Cancel Click the Finish button to close this dialog box and then the OK button to close the Map Properties dialog box The active map document should now show the name and horizontal precision for each point 37 30 00 00000 N 5 00 0000 122 10 00 0000f1 22 05 00 0000 22 00 00 0000 121 55 00 04 FE Time View t
67. the list of data providers attached to Internet Down load This is explained below You can also edit the properties of a provider or delete one that you will never use Click on El located after the Provider field This opens a new dialog box showing all the existing providers Inthe lower part of this dialog box click on the Add button This opens a new dialog box in which you can define a new provider The dialog box is slightly different depending on whether you want the new provider to be a raw data or precise orbit provider and the access to the website is public or restricted See Data Type field in screen examples below Name Host Data Type Compact RINEX Raw Data 00 YS Time Span E0 I i x OBS Fies a NAV Fies 0 lll ra po Data Type Precise Orbits Files More Info Po Time Span wo Public Access OBS Files PT C Restricted Access Comment a More Info Public Access Restricted Access Login I Password Cancel 290 Internet Download Adding new Providers to the Existing List of Providers This dialog box is organized and should be used as follows Name Enter the provider name or any other information relevant to this provider Host Enter the provider s web address Data Type Choose the type of data delivered by this provider compact RINEX raw data or precise orbits Time Span Internet Download needs to know the period of time covered
68. then only the collection name will appear along the Y axis For example select Name in the PLOT field and then click Next gt This opens the Layer Wizard Style dialog box 177 3 Reference Working in a Time Document You can now define the style of the objects that will be plotted in the time diagram For example select Type from the drop down menu associ ated with the Text field This menu lists all the attributes of the Points collection you have selected in a previous step Then freely choose any style that you would like to apply to this object text color background color position and symbol Click on the Finish button and then on the OK button The time document is now displayed in the View pane see figure below Data oon x BKINMAS6 x Logged Point 0002 x Logged Point 0003 x Logged Point 0004 x Logged Point 0005 x 0006 x Logged Point KINM x 1426 1996 1726 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 08 00 08 10 08 20 08 30 08 40 08 50 This view shows how and when each point was surveyed Note that you can create several layers and apply filters to your layers in the same way as you would in a map document 178 Reference Working in a Graph Document Working in a Graph Document You need to have a table document open on the View pane to create a graph in a graph document For example use the Tuto 3 project that you have created earlier LI C
69. they describe its true position The coordinates of this position can be expressed in any coordinate system For a reference point these are the point s coordinates expressed in the local system Fora target point these are the target coordinates that will be used in the surveying device to guide the field operator to this point They are also expressed in the local system Fora logged or intermediate point i e a point surveyed in the field this area is not displayed as no control coordinates are known for this point The check boxes before the coordinate fields indicate whether the point is 1D Height box checked 2D East North or Long Lat boxes checked or 3D all boxes checked Any coordinate you type in a field will not be valid if you do not check the box located before 3 This area provides the surveyed coordinates of the point as well as the name of the coordinate system in which these coordinates are expressed software set field Obviously if you are still in the preparation phase of your survey and as long as field results have not been downloaded to the project for the point this area is not displayed in the Point Properties dialog box This is true for all types of points except for control points When you create a control point GNSS Studio automatically fixes it which means sur vey coordinates are defined and set equal to the control coordinates you en ter 140 Reference Working in a Land Su
70. to a Collection from a Map Document Open the Tuto 3 project that you have created earlier and then follow the instructions below to create a new control point in this project Open the Survey View map document 157 3 Reference Working in a Map Document On the Map toolbar in the combo box located on the right select lt Project_Name gt Points Tuto_3 Points bd Tuto 3 Wareas Tuto 3 Lines Tuto aP onte On the Map toolbar click x Move the mouse cursor over the map and left click where you want to create the new point A new dialog box opens showing the coordinates of the new point resulting from where you clicked on the map Points 1 y e Iv 122 08 34 2697 WwW 0 000 37 22 43 8333 N 0 000 Iv 0 000 0 000 158 Reference Working in a Map Document According to what can be read on this dialog box GNSS Studio prompts you to create a fixed control point i e the control coordinates that result from where you have just clicked on the map are also defined as the point s survey coordinates If the displayed control coordinates are not exactly those of the control point correct these coordinates in the Long amp Lat fields If the control point is a 3D point check the Height check box and type the known Height coordinate for the point Complete the fields top left defining the control point The dialog box might then look like th
71. to the selected RINEX data file in the available files list The field is empty if meteorological BEGIN Click this button to begin converting the RINEX files to Ashtech format This field lists the suggested file name for the output B file raw measurement data This field lists the suggested file name for the output E file ephemeris data S File This field lists the suggested file name for the output S file site information The field is empty if site data were not entered into receiver Click this button to open the Set input directory dialog box See next entry in this Input dir bis ines This combo box lets you select the directory where the RINEX files are stored re Click this button to set the output directory the same as the input directory Output dir Click this button to open the Set output directory See next entry in this table Set output directory Select the directory where converted data files will be stored Select the overwrite options Prompt for Overwrite Always overwrite or Never over NaN write To select an overwrite option click the down arrow at the right end of the field files and select an overwrite option from the list presented Click this box if GPS data will be used in conversion This option is on by default 263 RINEX Converter Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format GLONASS Click this box if GLONASS data will be used in conversion on by default You will have GLONASS data
72. tree space D Prompt for overwrite v GLONASS M Efile M Sfile M 27546292K Exit About Help Use this dialog box to select the files you want to convert and define the conversion options 262 RINEX Converter Starting RINEX Converter The table below describes the fields in the RINEX to Ashtech dialog box Oe Lists the file types RINEX Observation files O All files RINEX NAV File types files N RINEX Nav g files G RINEX Met files M To select a file type click the down arrow D at the right end of the field and select file type from the list The white area below File Types List of files in current directory To select a file click on the file To select multiple files select the first file hold down the Ctrl key and select additional files by clicking with the cursor Available files list This field lists the file name of the observation data file corresponding to the selected RINEX data file in the available files list Nav This field lists the file name of the GPS navigation data file corresponding to the selected RINEX data file in the available files list This field lists the file name of the GLONASS navigation data file corresponding to N the selected RINEX data file in the available files list The field is empty if GLONASS Met data were not collected Navg data were not collected This field lists the file name of the Meteorological data file corresponding
73. typically select this function to update the Design view map document so that it shows your points with the corresponding icons and possibly lines are drawn between some of these points 341 12 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar 342 Group Points Transforms the selected points in the active map document as a line or an area The points involved in this operation may be deleted or kept unchanged Upload Positions to External Device Used to transfer a job to the field equipment in order to assist the operator in his her real time survey Export Positions to File on Disk Allows you to export different types of data to a file Each type may be in various formats Points NMEA or custom Vectors custom Land Survey Report Automatically generates a pre formatted report in RTF format Compute Datum Shifts Refines the set of 7 parameters datum shifts scale defining the datum of the project s system Computation based on the reference points that you specify Coordinate Calibration Computes the characteristics of a horizontal grid and a vertical correction based on the reference points that you specify Edit Settings Opens the Project Settings dialog box containing three dif ferent tabs The project s coordinate system and time zone are defined on the Region tab The geocodes and corresponding meanings that can be associated with the points of the active project are defined on the Geo codes
74. 1426 1996 1426 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 08 00 08 20 08 40 03 00 This diagram shows the imported raw data files observation files versus time The raw data file represented on top of this diagram was recorded at the base station control point 0001 and is the longest in time It is rep resented as a single gray rectangle ranging from 8 03 to 9 01 approxi mately The name of the point appears inside the rectangle The raw data file just underneath was recorded by the rover Several dis tinct rectangles are shown for this file Each of them is separated from the previous and next ones by a gray line denoting dynamic data logging Each of the rectangles represents a static occupation on a given point The name of the corresponding point appears inside each of these rectan gles The first 5 buttons from the map toolbar can be used on the Time view This means you can perform the following actions on the Time view select zoom in zoom out zoom to fit and grab Note A click on E when the Importing GPS data window is open see Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data on page 48 allows you to display the Time view BEFORE importing data files 53 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing LI Step 4 Re processing the Baseline in Kinematic Mode This step will allow you to determine the trajectory of the rover from any lo cation where static occupation was performed to the next occupation I
75. 273 PARK September 301998 18 00 30 0 1 625 Vertical 800372 _ b0008b98 273 PARK September 301998 19 07 00 0 P 1 625 Vertical 800372 b0014a98 273 PALO September 301998 17 51 20 0 P 1 925 Vertical 800372 b1112a98 273 DISC September 301998 19 09 50 0 1 925 Vertical 800372 b0005a98 273 J886 September 301998 18 02 50 0 P 1 578 Slant 800372 Control Points x Add Raw Data 0K Cancel 63 2 64 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Click inside the next cell or press the Tab key The other cells in this row will show all the properties of the newly chosen control point as deduced from one of the data files you want to import Control Points xX Enter the true coordinates of the PALO point see the exact values in the figure below and then fix this point horizontally to transform it into a fixed 2D control point select Hor in the Fixed cell Control Points x PALO 122 09 59 81800 0 000 37 26 39 59600 N 0 000 2 334 0 000 Hor amp ver or In the row underneath click in the Name cell and now select J886 as the second control point Click inside the next cell or press the Tab key The other cells in this row will show all the properties of the newly chosen control point as deduced from one ofthe data files you want to import Enter the true coordinates of the J886 point see the exact value
76. 6 01 38 94474 N 268 714 Processed static Ia 0002 37 13 24 3031 5 E 56 01 38 92404 N 268 679 Processed static weomsramts 5 0003 37 13 24 64576 E 56 01 38 78306 N 268 688 Processed static No constraints 6 0004 37 13 24 08492 E 56 01 38 15579 N 268 573 Processed static No constraints 0005 123456789012345678 37 13 24 43857 E 56 01 37 66048 N 268 650 Processed static No constraints is ooog 37 13 23 67879 E 56 01 37 91295 N 268 726 Processed static No constraints 4 4 gt PU Points A Lines A Areas A Files A Stops A Control Positions Repeat vectors 4 _Loop Closure Adjustme The Workbook table gathers all numeric values and processing parame ters resulting from the processing you have just run Use the horizontal scroll bar to access the right hand part of the table Also click on the dif ferent tabs located at the bottom of the pane to access the various catego ries of results For example in this tutorial results are displayed on the following tabs points files stops control positions processes vectors repeat vectors and control tie 52 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing On the Time view To view this diagram click on the Time View tvw tab and resize the View pane if necessary This diagram looks like this B0001496 026 3 m e pa m AN BKINMA96 026 KINM O00200B00Q00806 KINM
77. 6 Satellite time vs receiver time 284 Schedule view 196 SD Card 105 SD card 243 SEM almanac 186 Session parameters 247 Set Session parameters 247 S file 244 Simple GPS Recorder 227 Site Information 263 Software options 5 Software protection 5 Spatial Reference Systems coordinate systems 95 Split screen into 4 different views 203 Stop amp Go 46 113 Style 166 Styles 92 351 GNSS Studio User Manual Index Survey report 149 VA Deselecti 2 SV Deselection box 206 Z Max 3 243 T Z Max data collector 17 21 239 ZWET 278 Target point 128 Tau Test 323 Tbl 333 Test Time 344 Test Transfo 344 T file 244 Time of last modification 247 Time zone 95 TOA Time Of Almanac 183 Topic bar 15 78 U U file 244 250 Unlock software options 6 7 Uploading a Real Time Job 102 US coastguard 184 USB 5 245 248 USB port 105 v Valid antenna height range From To 97 Variance of Unit Weight Standard Error of Unit Weight 315 Vector Edit 141 Vector layer 32 Vector tab 147 148 View pane 16 W Wheel mouse 157 Workspace pane 15 World Map 208 Wsp 333 332 P N 630889 01A Thales Navigation Inc Corporate Headquarters Santa Clara U S A 1 408 615 5100 Fax 1 408 615 5200 Toll Free Sales in USA Canada 1 800 922 2401 Email professionalsales thalesnavigation com In South America 56 2 234 56 43 Fax 56 2 234 56 47 In China 86 10 6566 9866 Fax 86 10 6566 0246 European Headquarters
78. 672 In The Netherlands 31 78 61 57 988 Fax 31 78 61 52 027 Web site www thalesnavigation com Conventions used amp symbol indicates end of section All text strings from software shown in Arial Narrow Bold THALES NAVIGATION PROFESSIONAL PRODUCTS LIMITED WARRANTY North Central and South America Thales Navigation warrants their GPS receivers and hardware accessories to be free of defects in material and workmanship and will conform to our published specifications for the product for a period of one year from the date of original purchase THIS WARRANTY APPLIES ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT In the event of a defect Thales Navigation will at its option repair or replace the hardware product with no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor The repaired or replaced product will be warranted for 90 days from the date of return shipment or for the balance of the original warranty whichever is longer Thales Navigation war rants that software products or software included in hardware products will be free from defects in the media for a period of 30 days from the date of shipment and will substantially conform to the then current user documentation provided with the software including updates thereto Thales Navigation s sole obligation shall be the correction or replacement of the media or the software so that it will substantially conform to the then current user docu mentation Thales Navigation does not war
79. AND IF APPLICABLE IMPLIED WARRANTIES UNDER ARTICLE 35 OF THE UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS Some national state or local laws do not allow limitations on implied warranty or how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation may not apply to you 5 EXCLUSIONS The following are excluded from the warranty coverage 1 periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear 2 batteries 3 finishes 4 installations or defects resulting from installation 5 any damage caused by i shipping misuse abuse negligence tampering or improper use 1i disasters such as fire flood wind and lightning 111 unauthorized attachments or modification 6 service performed or attempted by anyone other than an authorized Thales Navigations Service Center 7 any product components or parts not manufactured by Thales Navigation 8 that the receiver will be free from any claim for infringement of any patent trademark copyright or other pro prietary right including trade secrets 9 any damage due to accident resulting from inaccurate satellite transmissions Inaccurate transmissions can occur due to changes in the position health or geometry of a satellite or modifications to the receiver that may be required due to any change in the GPS Note Thales Navigation GPS receivers use GPS or GPS GLONASS to obtain position velocity and time information
80. At Ste Dents EFSA 00004 13r 5 r Ww 2 0 m Frome pan 0 2001 A On Os To pan 0 2001 13 On Os UTC 01 0200 With amanse may 31 2001 Ev Mev 0 deg Cutan iyered y iF 3p GOOP RO T 1 Predected SVs Azimuth Geometec Dilution of Pracision J1D T At Site Biante 72955 0000 N 1 34 5 0000W 2 022m Al Ste Chante 43 253 0000 N 1 34 S 0000 W 2 002 m Frove per 8 2009 Se Om Os To ney 8 2008 12 Oe Or MITC 01 0200 Fionan 8 2001 Sh Ore Oe Toan 2001 12 Ome UTC 01 00 00 With aimanse muy 31 2001 Ev Mir 50 deg Osian pceed Wih abet ma J1 2001 Ev Nn 50 Costar gaad Id At UOISSI pats we To choose a different view in an area position the mouse cursor any where within the area and then select the desired view from the menu dis played after a right click Switching to two views and then back to a single view are simply obtained by dragging the concerned border out of the window or by dou ble clicking on it 203 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI Copying or printing the active view Click on or select Edit gt Copy to copy the active view to the clipboard so you can paste it in a document created with another program In the case of several views displayed concurrently the active view is merely the one in which you have last clicked Click on El or select File gt Print Preview to preview the active view Click on g or select File gt Print to print th
81. Description Format B file Raw code and carrier phase data range data clock data Binary E file Satellite ephemeris and timing data Binary S file Session information data ASCII ALM file Satellite almanac data Binary D file Event time tags and data ASCII ION file lonospheric data Binary T file RTK epoch solutions and vectors Binary C file Site position information ASCII 244 Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver Downloading Data From a Receiver Downloading and adding raw data from a GPS receiver to a project can be made directly in one easy step by selecting Download Raw Data from External De vice in the Project menu of GNSS Studio Use this option to insert data di rectly from the SD card residing in the Z Max receiver or the SD card removed from the receiver and inserted in the local SD card reader or from the hard disk k Ifyou have the option of removing the SD card from the receiver to download the files using an SD card reader you must still use Download to convert the files If you only copy the data from the SD card without converting them GNSS Studio will not be able to read and import them gt be z k Ifyou connect the PC to the Z Max via USB before starting Download make sure the receiver is turned on and connected to the PC Otherwise the Connect via USB button is grayed out 1 Connect the receiver to the PC There are two possible methods to down load d
82. E 217 Enabling communications with a GPS receiver ccccccccceeeeeesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 218 a UO as esc atiat E A ae teenistadees 219 E C T a eee re en RNC Ee Seer ve E OPTS ME NT ct Pe RUT nn RnR yO Rene Nin treme ete Ty ne 219 LY Auto Configure button c i ccccccsscccsssecceessseecessseccesseeeeesseecessseccceseeceeeseeesessaeeeesaees 219 E oe es e eee rn A E er eee 220 ET Load seines UGC aerisire eian a EnaA aANT cade NEES 220 LY Save settings button sssssessesssssssessesessessrseresssrtsseresssrersssrressriessesrseersssrresneeesseeesse 221 nS fc Le 10 i 1a annem a oe PA TAEAE E E AET AE eee E E ETE 222 Display AeA csinosan aa iea aaa aeiiaaie acaaacecus ec aaia idd 223 Sending a Command to the GPS receiver oo eee eccceesessesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeees 224 Cl Commands editor dialog BOX uinie iiia aiia 225 Simple GPS TECONGCE sicecceeseczssedcctcen cnscesacsecoedeaceetacedaaucedaetencnesencncieasdieisesacasiacescs 22 Procramimable GPS ToCOn Gl sac csceshescexonteceeaxansinuscusersecetcesesvesieteete necaeacanseeusaece 229 WV tt Onn SOL CUM nash Greate E A endancaseasadveroaeasoneens 234 Chapter 6 Geords VODIY csie 235 TAT UCL IO esee e E EEA E 235 penne d Geoid Model sesssrocseein i AOS 235 Extracting a Region from a Geoid Model ccccsscccccececceeseseeessesseeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Uploading a Geoid Model into a System cccccsssscececcceeceesesesessneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Importing a New Geoid Mod
83. E0001496 026 Output files D ASHSOLSAINEXOUT 00010261 960 Cancel All 21 Click OK A log file is created in the conversion directory When started RINEX converter overwrites the previous log file To save the previous log file rename or move the file before starting RINEX con verter Batch Processing To convert more than one file at a time Ifthe files are contiguous hold down the Shift key select files with the cursor and click each file Ifthe files are scattered throughout the directory hold down the Ctrl key select files with the cursor and click each file 4 280 DTR Utility Introduction Chapter 10 DTR Utility Introduction DTR is used to convert DSNP formatted raw data files into Observation Navigation files in RINEX format L Input files Input files should be DSNP raw data files containing binary or ASCII data Q Time labeling Format conversion involves changing the time labeling of the raw data This operation is required as the DSNP format is based on satellite time whereas the RINEX format uses receiver time Time labeling is changed through extrapolation 281 DTR Utility Introduction Q Naming the output files The output files can be named freely or using the conventions defined in the RINEX format namely lt site_name gt lt log_day gt lt file_index gt lt log_year gt lt type_code gt where lt site_name gt the first 4 characters from the name of t
84. EET TE THALES NAVIGATION GNSS Studio Office Software User Manual www thalesnavigation com NAVIGATION Copyright Notice Copyright 2004 Thales Navigation All rights reserved No part of this publication or the computer programs described in it may be reproduced translated stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior written permission of Thales Navigation Your rights with regard to this publication and the computer programs are subject to the restrictions and limitations imposed by the copyright laws and or the jurisdiction in which you are located Part No 630889 01A Trademarks All product and brand names mentioned in this publication are trademarks of their respective holders Thales Navigation Inc Corporate Headquarters Santa Clara CA USA 1 408 615 5100 Fax 1 408 615 5200 Toll Free Sales in USA Canada 1 800 922 2401 Email professionalsales thalesnavigation com In Washington D C 1 703 476 2212 Fax 1 703 476 2214 In South America 56 2 234 56 43 Fax 56 2 234 56 47 In China 86 10 6566 9866 Fax 86 10 6566 0246 European Headquarters Carquefou France 33 2 28 09 38 00 Fax 33 2 28 09 39 39 Email professionalsalesemea thalesnavigation com In Germany 49 81 6564 7930 Fax 49 81 6564 7950 In Russia 7 095 956 5400 Fax 7 095 956 5360 In UK 44 0 870 601 0000 Fax 44 0 208 391 1
85. GD deg Cen agreed en ee hini GDOP 1 22 b ep Goei kg Dja 3 ALESIS os il 3 i11 iL UTE oa eB oh amp T iF Ahir ia a5 ald 18 Oe ar wo m5 T DEF T H TE ti w d Ha 8 a7 aa po zi SAS niti TS 1 5 J ae re gb j it ae mE ain ar m Mee la Flo i Se am M Wi 45 Predipied Frs foledsa te fey 1 A Per oe Pea e jas EY is ee Toan E eB BI BR aera reap i EN obin dg Ciar greed Tin Lea fee 1 ia i itken PTH ee a Pemi L ee i i i G G E e a i ah m a E ON L in Tp g Ce greet Fradicisd Hwt we wes Sm a Doppler Elevation Azimuth Tva 7 le ha SP ie FT ee ee ew ee ee ee ae Ged l N Co tin TO g Comers greed ee Preieted Siis Ekrine dr ie Bae SS oe ee ee Pam in EN E le Tice prs Ee ee ee LI a ee eee eee fms aes A N ei a ae OE I he I a EAE Wih amma ma E N D Ml g Cis geal Pumhched Tri Anma ota ka OTH T a T kl Polar Preiched Syn Ade E brenta ob feet Ce ee Ter Tamia E N Gg i ae fe U a A w era n 7 N y eg L poed ein HTL i Da piy Gh Mh 22 ar b 4 1 i a ie op mi E 15 z4 i E ai pi l BOT a H one mame uid F L ae a g wI g 1s Ale z ok T 1 n 15 x iT I P 7 g a eT hadnt hiton ol Prenas 10147 i te fiiu ee PO a Bman DT ee as E N ee LE a 2 ee ee 185 Id At UOISSI pats we Mission Planning Utility Almanacs used in the prediction Mission Planning also allows you t
86. GNSS Studio uses the VB Script macro saved in Studio Macro This mac ro drives GNSS Studio to format the data read from the database Network Adjustment Adjusting your survey observations is one of the most important tasks to en sure accurate reliable results A network adjustment is performed to accom plish two results To test for blunders and errors in the observations vectors between points in our case To compute final coordinates for your survey points which are consistent with the existing control points that you used ki Only data sets with redundant observations closed loops benefit from an adjustment Performing an adjustment on radial vectors such as those obtained from a kinematic survey with only one base station will not identify errors in the observations nor improve the accuracy of the points surveyed Adjustment takes place after you have processed the raw data and are satis fied that there are no unaccountable errors in the processed results There are typically two stages in the adjustment The first the minimally constrained adjustment is used to detect prob lems in the observations and control coordinates You may have to iterate several times using a number of different tools to check for blunders Once you are confident that no blunders remain you can proceed to the second stage the constrained adjustment where you hold fixed all the control points and readjust to obtain final site positio
87. Lines T d S ay i Markers 0 15 i i i 3 7 Shrove All 7 35 20 7 35 40 7 36 00 7 36 20 7 30 40 T 37 00 7 37 20 7 3740 7 38 00 Legend 4 F i ER EMEY SVIA SVIBS SYTSS 5V2 SVA SVAF Soo Al gt The following characteristics of problem satellite data can cause poor results when processed Gaps in the data caused by extended loss of lock of the satellite This is characteristic of an obstructed satellite If all satellite plots have gaps during the same time periods the missing data may be with the reference satellite A Satellite with residuals noticeably larger than other satellites This is a characteristic of a satellite affected by multipath and or an active ionosphere If all satellite plots have residuals that seem larger than normal the problem may be with the reference satellite Reference Working in a Land Survey Project A segment of a satellite with residuals noticeably larger than the rest of the same satellite This is characteristic of a segment of satellite data affected by multipath and or an active ionosphere If all satellite plots have a segment with residuals that are larger than the rest or the residuals the problem may be with the reference satellite A Satellite with a sloped residual plot Residual plots should not be sloped and should have a mean value of 0 cycles A sloped plot usu ally indicates a problem with the satellite data If all plots are sloped this usually indicates that the reference s
88. M End Date End Time 12796 9 07 11 AM Time Zone GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris You can however edit these 4 parameters plus the time zone to meet your own needs To change the start or end date click on the correspond ing down arrow Reference Working in a Time Document A calendar is then displayed KE Janay ES gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 31 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 D Today 1 15 2004 e Click on the displayed year and use the up down arrows next to it to set the year e Click on the right left arrow to set the month e Click on the day number to set the day This closes the calendar When you agree with these parameters click OK to close the dialog box LI Defining the Y Axis of a Time Document 7 O oO O You define the Y axis by adding layers to the legend in the same way as you would in a map document On the menu bar select Time gt Legend This opens the Time Diagram Proper ties dialog box showing the content of the Legend tab Click i to define the first layer The new dialog box that opens allows you to specify the collection from which you want to define the layer Select a dated collection for example Points and then click OK This opens the Layer Wizard Data dialog box Inthe PLOT field choose the data you want to use as the graduation along the Y axis If you choose Default
89. M28 MGI Tra j bt care 1 2AUSTRIA MGI M31 MGI Tra capil abel ae AUSTRIA MGI M34 MGI Tra aS DENMARK ESTONIA H 7 FINLAND mS FRANCE SP GERMANY SP GREECE 57 HONG KONG H ISRAEL H ITALIA v 57 JAPAN of E lt Back Cancel The selected system name will then appear in the Spatial Reference System field From now on this system will also be available from the list attached to this field 82 Reference Coordinate Systems Ifyou check either Define a NEW PROJECTED system or Define a NEW GEO GRAPHIC system then GNSS Studio will allow you to define a new system see next pages LI Selecting a Coordinate System in a Document You can choose a specific coordinate system for any document whether a ta ble or map document without affecting the choice you have made for the whole project On the other hand as long as you do not specify anything else any document that you create in a project will by default use the coordinate system chosen for the project To change the coordinate system used in the active map document Right click anywhere within the map document and select View in the menu that pops up The View dialog box opens This box shows the coor N dinates of the central point on the map as well as the scale currently used me See example below g O Legend View Region xC mee Scale EE 37251972200 17175716 Spatial Reference System EF WGS 84 J l m Options M Dis
90. O EAE AA l a U lity Programs Provided cccesvscevcanintuasecvaasarcnaasevacaserseuieadeotsounnewereeumnpiaceannenoneaniates oon Z ETET o a EET E E AEE I AA AAEE TE E E E ROE 4 Q Minimum System Requirements cccccccccsssccessseccessccecessseccssseccecsseeecesseecessseeeeeseeeenas 4 SW Installing GNSS Si Gago sc iecicoseh cc Gesacsres anii aAA ea 4 LY Unlocking a Software Option cccccccccccssseccessseceeesseceeesseecessseccesseeecesseccesseeceesseeeeesaes 6 LJ Using a license File Rather Than a Dongle ccccccccccssscccsssecceesseeeeesseecessseeeeeseeeeenas T Chapter 2 Tutorials c ccevscesiessctecsctushcicesss ssecencvtacsesdncancsiveteuasiebessaversetisesseiiicce 9 Mutorial 12 Real ime SUNE Y osinetan 9 e Pee eee a E E E TE E eetey 9 L Step 1 Creating a New Project cccccccssssccssssccessscecesseccessseceeesaeecesseccessseecessseeeeees 11 Q Step 2 Importing Points into the Project sssssssensssnesssesessessssersssresssesssserrsssreessres 14 LY Step 3 Analyzing the Content of the Project ccccccesccccssseccessseeeesseecesseeceesseeeeens 15 LI Step 4 Uploading the Job to the Surveying Device ccccccccccessceeesseeeeesseeceesseeeeens 17 Ey Ss S Fed Suey aia cctnrie E ahaa soe eae 20 LY Step 6 Downloading Results ccc ccccscccesssceceessscccssseecesssceeeesseecessseccessseeceesseeeeeas 21 LI Step 7 Analyzing the Content of the Project after Downloading Resullts
91. Once the adjustment is complete data appear in the Adjustment Analysis tab of the Workbook window The table below describes the Adjustment Analysis tab Component Description Reference Rover Names of the points forming the vector Start_Time Month day and time for the vector Adj_QA Button cleared if any residual component of the vector does not pass the QA test Otherwise checked Tau Test Button cleared if any residual component of the vector does not 7 pass the Tau test Otherwise checked M eee meres Length_Residual Residual of the adjusted vector length Adj_DX Adjusted vector component in the x direction DX_Residual Residual of the adjusted vector component x Adj_DY Adjusted vector component in the y direction DY_Residual Residual of the adjusted vector component y Adj_DZ Adjusted vector component in the z or vertical direction DZ_Residual Residual of the adjusted vector component z The first test GNSS Studio performs is the Network Connectivity test This test ensures that the network does not contain any subnetworks that are not connected Refer to Network Connectivity Test on page 315 for more information After this test text similar to the following appears in the Output pane Network connectivity test passed Number of stations 6 Number of vectors 9 310 Appendices Network Adjustment If this test fails there are actually two or more unconnected net
92. Processing Baselines Press the F5 or F6 key or in the Workspace pane click on the Com 116 mands tab then on the Process topic bar and then on the Process All Base lines icon equivalent function on the menu bar Project gt Process All Baselines GNSS Studio will then run the last saved processing scenario The results will then appear in the various open documents If you do not change the legend defined on the Survey view map docu ment for processed vectors then you will get the following colors to qualify the vectors e Green QA test was successful for these vectors e Red QA test failed for these vectors Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Remember however that you can change the aspect of any layer repre sented in a map document 1 e choose different colors shapes and or change the data filter applied to the layer To do this select Legend on the Map menu highlight the layer and click on Ei Processed Yectors QA test passed Properties q x Data Style Processed ectors QA test passed Properties x Collection Tuto _3 Wectors Data Style As Layer ME T Text Fite Attribute Filter X Adjusted No X Proc_OA Yes X Dynamic No x Y aL Eaa O Mne 7 I Display orientation Nomal Selected IV Display error ellipse 7 O oO O O Cancel Q Clearing Process Results Inthe Workspace pane click on the Comman
93. Schedule view This view shows the times when each satellite is visible as well as the total number of visible satellites at any given time within the prediction The period of time during which a satellite is visible is represented as a bold horizontal line The red multi line 1s representative of the total number of vis ible satellites at any time during the prediction Grey lines if any indicate unhealthy satellites Example of Schedule view Predicted S s Schedule At Site Biarritz 43 20 59 0000 H 17 34 5 0000 2 022 mi From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2007 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2007 Ey Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored gh m Os Local Time 12h m Us 196 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI Range view This view shows the variations of distance between each of the visible satel lites and the observation point Example of Range view Predicted S s Range At Site Biarntz 43 28 59 OO00 N 1 34 5 0000 2 022 m From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2001 12h Orn Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ey Mir 5 0 deg Curtain ignored 9h Orn Os Local Time 197 az 5 e tiel UoISSIN Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI Doppler view This view shows the variations of speed for each of the visible satellites with respect to the observation point Example of Do
94. Select the desired port Comm parameter that is the computer port connected to the desired GPS receiver and the appropriate serial communication parameters baud rate etc to match those of the re ceiver With Thales Navigation receivers the baud rate will be adjusted automati cally if you use the Auto Configure button 218 WinComm Utility Enabling communications with a GPS receiver LJ OK button Clicking the OK button activates the current serial port parameter settings and closes the Communication Settings dialog box This enables communications between the computer and the GPS receiver unless the serial port parameter settings do not match those of the receiver connected LI Cancel button Clicking the Cancel button closes the Communication Settings dialog box Any changes you made in this dialog box are ignored LI Auto Configure button Auto Configure initiates an automatic search for the baud rate and receiver type Use this button if you are not sure about the baud rate or if you wish to view the type of the receiver connected An automatic search for the baud rate and receiver type is only allowed with Thales Navigation receivers as this requires that the receiver be capable of returning a consistent reply to a TEST 1 or IDENT command After choosing Auto Configure you are allowed to Disable the communication by clicking Cancel Or if the identification is successful close the Communication Setting dia
95. Studio icccccccssscccsssecceesseeceesseeecessseccessecesesseeceesseecessseeceeeeeeeeaes 76 Q Notions of Workspace amp Database siiiscsiicecsdassiccasssnssisvasnecensiansceuevensdbess0navasdoeesevenevesvexes 76 G Commands tabassa a La 78 E e E E E E E O 79 Coordinate Systeri sesanan E fuses anoeseatneneneveeceaencees 80 E SE CENT ea a EO E E E 80 Q Selecting a Coordinate System for the Active Project cccccccsscccessscceessseeeeesseeeessaes 81 Selecting a Coordinate System in a Document c ce eeeeeeceesecceeesseecessseeceesseeceesseeeeess 83 LY Creating a Projected System cccccccccsscceessscccessseceesseeeeecsseecessseccesseeeeecsseesessseeeesaees 84 El Creating a Geographic Sy Stent mossies denni iaaa 88 Q Creating a Geocentric System sssssssssessssesssresssesssrossseressseresseressrerssserssseressreessnessses 88 Q Managing Coordinate Systems ccccccccssscccssscceessseeccsssecceseeceesseeecesseeceenseeeeesseesensaes 89 Working ina Land Survey Project xsece csdcecesdeedecticeractetescececesdcncancaentes tecnntedsadsecaedecs 90 i cheese tees cede cee ge bee eee 90 PE VC I eiriaa a E EEE EEA 95 Q Uploading a Real Time Job ccccccccccccssscccsseececesseecesseeccesseeceesseeecessseceesseeeecseeesenas 102 LY Downloading Field Results c cccccccccccsscceecsseecessseccessseeeesseecceseeceessseecessseeeeseeeeens 103 LY Uploading Waypoints amp Control Points to ProMark2 cc ceccccecescceeseee
96. ace will be closed before opening the selected one Close Workspace Closes the currently open workspace Saves the work space and its project s before closing them all Print xxx Prints the active document xxx table graph report or map 334 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Print Preview Previews the active document to see what it will look like when printed Print Setup Opens the Print Setup dialog box to choose printer settings Recent Workspaces Lists the 4 workspaces last open Selecting one in the list closes the currently open workspace and opens the selected one Exit Exits GNSS Studio gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN LJ Edit Menu Undo Undoes the last action performed when applicable Redo Cancels the last Undo action performed Cut Cuts the current selection to the clipboard Copy Copies the current selection to the clipboard Paste Pastes the data from the clipboard at the insertion point Paste Special Only if the active document is a report Prompts different paste options before the data is effectively pasted from the clipboard at the insertion point Delete Deletes the document currently selected in the Documents tab or the object currently selected in the active document Rename Renames the document currently selected in Documents tab Find Only if the active document is a report Finds the word or sen tence that you specify Find Next Only if the active docume
97. al PT3 3D 0 012 0 000 PTS 3D 0 013 0 000 8 PT14 3D 0 014 0 000 3 m e pa p AN Add Edit emnove Advanced Results OF Cancel Clicking the OK button will allow GNSS Studio to use the newly deter mined local system as the project s new spatial reference system Click ing Cancel would cause GNSS Studio to continue using the coordinate system initially chosen for the project If you click OK GNSS Studio will then update points and vectors In the upper right corner of the map doc ument the term Fitted will then be used to describe the new coordinate system used in the document This system will also be used at project level k On the above dialog box note that the characteristics of the local system can be displayed by clicking the Results button then see these characteristics on the Projection and System tabs Click OK to define the newly determined local system as the project s new spatial reference system 27 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 9 Exporting Data to a File 28 Click on the Points tab located at the bottom of the Workbook tbl document displayed underneath the Survey View Select the first 16 points on this tab To do this click once in the leftmost cell in the first row and then while holding down the Shift key click any where in the 16th row In the Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on
98. ap documents as necessary in a project The defaults Design View and Survey View are created when creating the project To create other map documents select File gt New from the menu bar or click on the Cre ate New Document on the Project topic bar and then ask for a new map docu ment to be created with a name that you specify The default coordinate system used in a map document is always the one de fined for the project You can however use another coordinate system spe cifically for this map document using the Map gt View command 2 Default Documents Created in a Project 7 O oO O These are listed in the Workspace pane on the Documents tab The figure be low shows the default documents of an open project as listed in the work space pane izi x Workspace Tuto 4 1 project s Tuto_4 documents E Design View MH Survey View E Workbook Time View Saved reports will also appear as text files in the Documents tab To delete a document select its name in this pane press the Del key and then confirm this action 91 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 92 The default documents include 2 map documents as explained in the previ ous page and one table document The Design View document only shows the points in the survey whereas the Survey View also shows baselines vectors and processes The default table document gives numeric and status inform
99. ap_ documents the open workspace Typical project database architecture Project name collections Atras Lines 4 4 Points a Gy ies Set of collections present N Loops in the land survey project Processes A Repeat Vectors Stops A Vectors To know more about the different collections you can find in a project please refer to the Appendices section at the end of the manual TI 3 Reference Introduction Q Commands tab The Commands tab is one of the three tabs that can be viewed in the Work space pane located in the left hand part of the GNSS Studio main window When no workspace is open in GNSS Studio the Commands tab is the only visible tab in this pane The Commands tab is designed to help you choose the right command at the right time The available commands are organized by topic and are in fact those accessible from the GNSS Studio menu bar more particularly those from the Project menu but here they are shown as large icons with command names displayed underneath To run one of these commands simply click the icon The number of topics contained in the tab is context sensitive Among these topics is the Utilities topic permanently available and that you can custom ize using the command Tools gt Customize Tools tab To open a topic when several topics are available click the horizontal topic bar showing the name of the topic CAD Adjustment Upload P
100. as Af ps 180 2444 SY Clock Dritt AH ris OU 0000 Week 1116 Page Down Mission Planning Utility Defining the observation point Defining the observation point When launching Mission Planning a prediction for the last selected observa tion point is run You can preset the observation point from the GNSS Studio window by do ing the following Select the desired observation point in any of the open documents table map etc Press F2 This automatically launches Mission Planning The selected point in GNSS Studio then becomes the observation point in Mission Planning The parameters defining an observation point are its name its WGS84 coor dinates Lat Lon Alt and the curtain placed on this point The definition of an observation point can be saved to be used at a later date To define the observation point Click on 4l or on the menu bar select Edit gt Site and complete the fol lowing fields Site Give a name to the observation point Lat Long Enter its latitude and longitude By completing manually the Lat and Long fields Or by using the World Map Editor located on the right This tool allows you to complete automatically the previous two fields by selecting the point graphically on the surface of the globe see World Map editor on page 208 Alt Define the point s altitude by completing manually this field az a 5 jul e va UoISSIN 189 Mission Planning Utility Def
101. as there are different types of points To add a new layer you have to 1 Choose the collection on which the layer will apply to 2 Name the layer 3 Define a filter on the attributes of the source collection In fact the defi nition of the layer will result from the choices you make in this step 4 Define a style icon and associated text specific to the layer GNSS Stu dio will refer to this style to represent each of the objects meeting the layer criteria 7 O oO O In the example below you will create a new layer called Control Points re ferring to any object from the Points collection for which Type Control Points This will be done using the Tuto _3 project created earlier First you will create a new map document as follows On the menu bar select File gt New Select Map on the Documents tab Name the new document by typing a name in the File Name field For example type ControlMap Click OK A new blank map document opens on the View pane Then On the menu bar select Map gt Legend On the Legend tab click i 163 3 Reference Working in a Map Document Inthe new dialog box that opens select Points Open collection x Look In le Tuto_2 collections Fa Collection name Points Collections of type all Map Layers points lines areas raste 7 Cancel Click OK In the Layer Wizard Data dialog box that opens type a name e g
102. ata either you connect the Z Max via serial port or via USB port Using USB is recommended as data transmission is much faster in this case Verify that the power is on 2 Select Download Raw Data from External Device from the Project menu of GNSS Studio 245 7 246 Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver The Download main window appears 1 Download gt PC File Edit View Receiver Help Se e5 F S item s 2 3 MB The Download main window consists of two panes The right pane the PC Personal Computer pane lists the files if any in the project direc tory of the PC The left pane currently blank will list the files on the SD card once you have selected the right folder on your PC case where the SD card is inserted in the SD card reader or the data file micro_z bin from the SD card has already been copied unchanged to the PC hard disk or once the connection to the Z Max is established case where the SD card stays in the receiver Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver The table below describes the toolbar buttons Button Description 5 Connect via Cable button Click this button to open the Connect via Cable dialog and connect to the Z Max via serial line cp Connect via USB button Click this button to open the Connect via USB dialog and connect to the Z Max via USB line Connect via IR button Not used with Z Max Switch Data Source button Click this bu
103. atellite is a problem A Satellite contributing a very small amount of data compared to the other satellites in the data set Sometimes such a satellite causes problems with processing You can remove any data exhibiting the above characteristics and repro cess the vector Process Results Provides the following results for the vector DX DY DZ components and associated uncertainties plus vector length in the selected unit Adjustment Results Same as Process Results Displayed only after the vec tor has been adjusted Adjusted button checked Residual Displayed only if Adjustment Results are available and displayed For each result this pane provides the deviation between initial process and adjustment 7 O oO O O The Point tab provides the properties of the point where the vector ends 145 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Editing a Line Lines KINM Ed Line Point Offset Vector 1 397 Name KINN Description Layer Comment 2D Length 107 652 3D Length 113 153 The properties of a line i e a trajectory or polyline are presented on a 4 tab dialog box see above To open this box double click a line displayed in the active map document The Line tab contains the following information Name and description of the line name of the layer the line belongs to comment A graphic view of the line showing its geometry a
104. ation Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DY standard deviation Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DZ standard deviation Adjusted length standard deviation Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DX confidence 95 Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DY confidence 95 Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DZ confidence 95 Adjusted length confidence 95 Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DX 7 DY correlation Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DX 7 DZ correlation Adjusted ECEF WGS84 DY 7 DZ correlation ECEF WGS84 DX component residual ECEF WGS84 DY component residual ECEF WGS84 DZ component residual Total residual on vector length Tau test passed 331 gt ge 5 a gt 2n m o er Cq AN 12 Appendices Database in a Land Survey Project LJ Repeat Vectors Collection 123 From 23 To 4 Observation1 R5 Observation2 x OA 123 Length 123 DiX 123 Difi Y 123 Diff_Z 123 Diff_Lenath 123 Diff_ lt _PPM 123 Diff Y _PPM 123 Diff_Z PPM 123 Diff_Lenath_P 123 Diff_X_Ratio 123 Diff_Y_Ratio 123 Diff_Z Ratio 123 Diff_Lenath_ From point To point Time of first vector start time of occupation Time of second vector start time of occupation Vector quality assurance test passed Processed length DX component gap DY component gap DZ component gap Length gap DX component gap in ppm DY component gap in ppm DZ component gap in ppm Length gap in ppm Dx component gap ratio DY component gap ratio DZ component gap ratio Length gap ratio LI Loop Collection 332 123 Loop vig Loop_Le
105. ation of each point where static occupation took place is repre sented by a flag icon on top of an upright stick The name of the point is displayed next to it 66 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Each imported file is represented by a diskette icon The name of the file is displayed in gray characters next to the diskette icon Each of these icons is positioned on the map based on the straight GPS solution GNSS Studio determines from the corresponding data file The baselines from which all vectors proceed are represented by red dotted lines connecting the diskette icons You need to zoom in to see these lines In the Workbook table Click on the Points tab and resize the window if necessary This table looks like this a o pa AN Workbook tbl Tuto_3 WGS 84 Meters Name Description Long 1a emps height ESE E a E aaa MSS 121 59 11 90691 37 23 20 04067 N 15 297 Adjusted 121 59 54 43040 37 24 41 57943 N 21 983 Adjusted 3 Palo PALO ALTO SE BASE 122 09 59 81800 37 26 39 59600 N 2 399 Adjusted Horizonta 4 ose 4 248 59 49 31019 37 24 45 37008 N 20 336 Adjusted 5 J886 NGS J886 RESET 196 121 54 03 53474 37 27 19 40457 N 0 850 Adjusted Vertical F id 4 gt gt i Points A Lines A Areas A Files A Stops A Control Positions A Processes A Vectors A Repeat vectors A Loop Closure A Cont
106. ation on the land survey in progress points lines vectors processes etc A very important thing to know about table documents is that they can easily be filled from any collection through a simple drag amp drop operation You just have to drag the selected collection from the Collections tab Work space pane to the open table document View pane and then release the mouse once the cursor is somewhere inside the table cursor shape m As a result the table is overwritten with the data from that collection Three more types of documents can be created in a project Time views Blank time views are created using File gt New Time Time views can also be filled through drag amp drop from the Collections tab Workspace pane Graphs Blank graphs are created using File gt New Graph Graph docu ments can also be filled through drag amp drop but this time from any data column selected in a table document Reports Blank reports are created using File gt New Report In addition project reports can be created using the Project gt Generate Report command Project reports are created based on specific templates depending on the type of generated report 3 Representing database objects on a map Almost any collection in a project database can be represented on a map GNSS Studio refers to styles to visualize objects from collections Styles can be user modified Reference Working in a Land Survey Project A sty
107. ays overwrite or Never over write To select an overwrite option click the arrow D at the right end of the field and select an overwrite option from the list presented GPS Click this box if GPS data will be used in conversion This option is on by default GLONASS Click this box if GLONASS data will be used in conversion on by default There will be no GLONASS data unless a GLONASS receiver was used to collect data Overwrite files 270 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format Obs Click this box to create an observation file when converting to RINEX Nav Click this box to create a navigation file when converting to RINEX files Navg Click this box to create a GLONASS navigation file when converting to RINEX Met Click this box to create a meteorological file when converting to RINEX Will be cre ated only if meteorological data available Free Space Exit Close RINEX Converter About Opens the dialog box which displays the software version number This field displays the disk drive space available for the selected output directory Help Opens the on line help system 2 Click Input dir to open the Set input directory dialog box Set input directory EEG Files of Type ASHTECH FILES b e s d ion Cancel 271 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 3 Using standard Windows navigation procedure navigate to the directory that conta
108. be surface 210 Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor Curtain editor LJ What is a curtain Seen from the observation point some directions in space may exist in which GPS reception for some reason is bad The concept of curtain is introduced specifically to describe these particular directions so that the signals received from this region of space can be curtained if necessary For a given observation point the curtain consists of one or more obstruction zones seen from this point Each obstruction zone is defined in relation to Az imuth Az and Elevation Ev A curtain may be drawn on a polar view centered on the observation point or on linear view showing elevation vs azimuth Once the curtain is drawn on a view it is also visible on the other A curtain may also be defined by specifying each of the points making it up As aresult the curtain also appears on the two views as if it had been drawn On the chart the area located between Elevation Angle 0 and the user set Min Elev angle see bottom of the tab is considered as part of the curtain also shown in blue When you enable the curtain in a prediction computation you allow the ap plication to behave as if there were no GPS signals received in the curtain s direction UOISSIJA az a 5 jul e va Q Accessing the curtain editor for a given observation point Click on E or in the menu bar select Edit gt Site Define the observatio
109. cal coordi nates are known in the local system and that will be surveyed for calibration purposes Point Target A point whose theoretical coordinates known in the local sys tem are provided for staking out purposes Process A process describes the way a pair of observation files can be pro cessed to form a baseline and to produce a vector Raster image A bitmap file as opposed to a vector file providing a visual representation an image of a map a photo etc when edited System Geocentric A coordinate system based on the definition of a datum providing a horizontal system only System Geographic A coordinate system based on the definition of a datum providing a horizontal and vertical system System Projected A coordinate system based on the definition of a datum and a projection 348 Add Area 160 Layer to map document 163 Line 160 Object on a map 157 Second curve to graph document 180 ALM file 244 Area Edit 147 As Workbook 336 At Time view 195 Atmospheric data 278 Azimuth view 200 B Background map 1 Background project 31 B file 244 Blunder Detection 340 Build Process Scenario 340 C Calibration 125 Carrier phase questionable 136 CBEN 244 CD ROM drive 4 C file 244 Change Curtain view 212 Change Into 130 Chi Square test 318 Collection Areas 329 Files 328 Lines 329 Points 330 Processes 328 Repeat vectors 332 Stops 329 GNSS Studio User Manual Index Vectors 331 Collection definit
110. ceiv ers Unless you are satisfied with the current setting select this com mand to toggle the setting Checked there is no internal memory in the attached receiver Inter nal Memory Reader option disappears from the Win Comm window Always make this choice with the current range of receivers Cleared there is an internal memory in the attached receiver Internal Memory Reader option available in the Win Comm window 222 WinComm Utility Display area Display area After communication is enabled between the computer and a GPS receiver the Display pane allows you to view the data stream on the receiver port in cluding data output in response to any command generated by Wincomm If you wish to enlarge the Display pane click El in this pane top right This causes the pane to be transformed into a separate window which you can move re size using the usual commands assigned to windows in the Windows environment To restore the Display pane at the initial location click Flor top right Display area defined as a separate window Display Clear View Print View As the data may be refreshed every 0 1 seconds it is not possible to log all that flows through the port so that it can be displayed at a later date or this would require a huge memory size For that reason only the latest 100 data lines are stored and can be viewed using the vertical scroll bar available O Z 223 WinComm Uti
111. ch you can drag and drop all the vector and raster collections from all these projects The map document will be based on a coordinate system that you will freely choose 155 3 Reference Working in a Map Document Working in a Map Document LI Creating a Map Document in an Open Project On the GNSS Studio menu bar select File gt New Select Map on the Documents tab Name the new document by typing a name in the File Name field Click OK A new blank map document opens on the View pane LI Tools Available in a Map Document The following tools are available to work in a map document Toolbar Zoom to fit button ad Grab button slides the map in the Layer combo box justs the map scale so direction in which you drag the Combined with one of the three buttons that all the objects mouse cursor by a value tied to on the right allows you to create new present on the map the distance traveled by the cur objects in the project database These can be seen sor while being dragged objects will then appear on the map 2 fio a x B Tuto_3 Points Select but 5 5 Scale factor choose a pre Point Line Area buttons ton once 5 3 2 set value from the combo once one of these has been clicked s 3 box Clicking on the zoom clicked the corresponding any object z amp to fit button will also cause object can be created
112. confusion save the converted Ashtech files to a different directory than where the RINEX files are located 273 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 9 Click Save to accept the directory and return to the Set input directory dia log box The Output Directory field lists the directory path 10 Click Additional Info to open the Additional info for selected files dialog box to 274 the Obs tab Additional info for selected files Obs Nav Met Station Name Station Number Observer AGENCY Observing AGENCY Creating Current File Comments Receiver Serial All Optional Headers M Antenna Offsets north rm 0 0000 Offsets East m 0 0000 Delta Vertical m 0 0000 Radius m 0 0000 Slant Distance m 0 0000 Iype Serial Cres The information listed in these tabs are stored in RINEX files to give you reference information about the data Although this additional informa tion is optional it provides a useful reference for future use RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 11 Complete the fields in the Obs tab The information entered in the Obs dialog box is stored in the observation data file The table below describes each field Field Description STATION INFORMATION Name of the survey point or station where data was collected Station Name Station Number Number of the survey po
113. cords 23 Size File size KB 23 Meas_Type Measurement type Ate Antenna_Type Antenna model used for data collection gt Antenna_H eight Default antenna height 23 Height_Type Default antenna height type Pie Site Default site name X Dynamic Indicates whether the receiver has been moved during Me ReceiverType Type of used receiver Me ReceiverNu Serial number of used receiver LJ Processes Collection Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D line expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following classic attributes Process number in process scenario Reference site used to get reference position Reference_File Reference file Rover Rover site used to store process results Rover_File Rover File Mode Processing mode Min_Elevation Satellite elevation under which data must be rejected Satellites that must be excluded in any case Satellites that can t be used as reference Measurements that must be excluded from process Orbit type Indicates whether L2 data have to be process or not X Fix_Integers Indicates whether process have to fix integers or not X Done Indicates whether process has been exectuted or not 328 Appendices Database in a Land Survey Project O Stops Collection Ss Each object in the collection has the following attributes S oF Abe Point Occupied point name a gt Phe Description Occupied point feature code DP Kl Start_Time Start time of occu
114. ct thus extending the possibilities for surveyors to present their field re sults 1 1 Introduction to GNSS Studio Presentation 2 GNSS Studio also includes the following functions Network adjustment Data import export Report generation Coordinate system management OpenGIS compliant database management tool etc Utility Programs Provided Different built in tools are provided in GNSS Studio They are used to Edit manage coordinate systems used by GNSS Studio Transform coordinates from a known system to another known system Set leap seconds involved in the GPS to UTC time conversion at any given date Transform GPS week amp time into local date amp time In addition GNSS Studio is delivered with 7 separate utility programs Mission Planning is used to depict the GPS constellation seen from any given point located on the Earth surface at any given time in the past or future Mission Planning provides both qualitative and quantitative figures about the constellation then visible You can then use Mission Planning to choose the best moment when to per form a survey In addition the Curtain function allows you to simulate the impact of close obstructions on the number of usable satellites on the GDOP etc Mission Planning can also be used when post processing files as a monitor ing tool for example for better understanding of what happened when logging the raw data files Introduction to GNSS Stud
115. ction in the Time zone field Choose Meters in the All Distances in field Click on the Miscellaneous tab and then enter 0 25 15 s in the Minimum Vector Time Span field 47 Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing Click on the OK button twice As a result a new project named Tuto 2 opens in the GNSS Studio main window and the following dialog box is displayed What would you like to do next Download Raw Data from Receiver Download Positions from Receiver or RTK Controller Import Positions from Files on Disk x Do Not Import Anything Now LI Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data This step includes defining a control point Insert the GNSS Studio CD ROM in the computer s CD drive Click on the Import Raw Data from Files on Disk button This opens the Browse dialog box Using the Look in combo box select the following folder on the GNSS Studio CD ROM Samples Stop amp Go While holding down the Shift key click on the first and then on the sec ond filename to select the two observation files GPS data files present in the folder 48 Tutorials Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing Click the Open button to start importing these files into the project A message then briefly appears denoting data loading in progress In the Importing GPS Data dialog box that appears afterward see figure below GNSS Studio
116. cuments at a time The Window gt Cascade Tile Horizontally amp Tile Vertically options apply to the documents open in the View pane regardless of whether View gt As Workbook is checked or not These options do not affect the document window docked to the GNSS Studio main window if there is one When you launch GNSS Studio for the first time and as long as you do not clear this option the View gt As Workbook option is checked When you create a new project GNSS Studio creates and opens a number of documents that are organized as follows Survey view Design view and Time view shown in the View pane Workbook table document docked to the GNSS Studio main window 79 7 O oO O Reference Coordinate Systems Coordinate Systems LJ Introduction Coordinate systems are organized as summarized in the table below Definition i l Datum Projection System Definition Projected SAUNY NOTING HEIJN name units labels vertical datum l Datum System Definition name Geographic Latitude Longitude Height nite labels vertical datum Geocentric X ECEF Y ECEF Z ECEF aun System Definition name units GNSS Studio strictly complies with OpenGIS concerning coordinate trans formations GNSS Studio supports the following projections Transverse Mercator Lambert Conformal Conic 1SP Lambert Conformal Conic 2SP Oblique Stereographic Oblique Mercator Lambert Con
117. d 241 Intermediate point 128 ION file 244 L Layer 94 Layers Stacking rule 45 Leap Seconds 344 Leap seconds 2 Legend 94 163 License 5 License vs dongle 7 Line Edit 146 Linear distance unit 96 Local Obstructions 190 Logged point 128 Loss of lock 136 LSP 333 M Macro 149 Map 333 Map scale 17 Map toolbar 156 Marker 204 Markers 136 Mask 115 Maximum acceptable control error 98 Met file 263 Micro_z bin 246 Minimum Elevation 207 Minimum vector time span 97 Move selected file 247 N NADCON 327 Nav g file 263 NAV file 263 NMEA 0183 3 O OBEN 244 Object properties 133 Object size 166 Observation File 263 Observation file Edit 135 Time diagram 137 Observation point 189 Observation Residuals 319 Offset tab 147 148 OpenGIS 2 80 Operating system 4 Output pane 17 P Parallel port 5 Password 7 PC card 4 Point Edit 138 Point Types 128 Polar view 201 Polyline is 3D 101 Polyline On 101 Possible loss of lock 136 Prediction options 205 Programmable GPS Recorder 229 Projection definition 86 R RAF 235 Range view 197 GNSS Studio User Manual Index Raster image 34 Sizing 35 Supported formats 34 Raster images 1 Raw measurement data 263 Rebuild process scenario automatically on any change 99 Receiver Type 220 Reference point 128 Repeat Vectors 332 Report documents 92 Residuals 143 Results file 9 RINEX 3 RS232 line 248 RS232 serial ports 4 Rtf 333 Ruler 91 S Sampling 13
118. d a point on the map Draw Lines Allows you to add a line on the map Draw Areas Allows you to add an area on the map Ruler Shows hides the coordinates on the map Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Grid Shows hides the grid on the map Legend Provides access to the Map Properties dialog box Legend tab This tab allows you to choose the objects you want to show or hide on the map You can also define the visual aspect that GNSS Studio must give to each type of object color icon shape label etc View Provides access to the Map Properties dialog box View tab This tab indicates the coordinates of the map s current central point the scale cur rently used the name of the coordinate system Spatial Reference Sys tem used and the current settings for the map viewing options grid and ruler gt ge g a gt 2 m e er lq DM LJ Project Menu Land Survey Project Context Land Survey Project active Set Active Project Allows you to choose which project must be active you have to make this choice if there is more than one project in the work space Download Raw Data from Receiver Runs the Download module allowing you to download raw data files from a receiver Import Raw Data From Files on Disk Allows you to import raw data in vari ous formats into the active project Ashtech B RINEX o d DSNP bin var d 339 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar 340 Down
119. de secrets and 8 any damage due to accident resulting from inaccurate satellite transmissions Inaccurate transmissions can occur due to changes in the position health or geometry of a satellite or modifications to the receiver that may be required due to any change in the GPS Note Thales Navigation GPS receivers use GPS or GPS GLONASS to obtain position velocity and time information GPS is operated by the U S Government and GLONASS is the Global Navigation Satellite System of the Russian Federation which are solely responsible for the accuracy and maintenance of their systems Certain conditions can cause inaccuracies which could require modifications to the receiver Examples of such conditions include but are not limited to changes in the GPS or GLONASS transmission Opening disman tling or repairing of this product by anyone other than an authorized Thales Navigation Service Center will void this warranty THALES NAVIGATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS DAMAGES RESULTING FROM DELAY OR LOSS OF USE LOSS OF OR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY EVEN THOUGH CAUSED BY NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER FAULT OFTHALES NAVIGATION OR NEGLIGENT USAGE OF THE PRODUCT IN NO EVENT WILL THALES NAVIGATION BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SUCH DAM AGES EVEN IF THALES NAVIGATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM
120. ding session should begin The current date is prompted by default Start Time Used to specify the time when the recording session should begin The current time is prompted by default Duration Used to specify the planned duration of the recording session Automatic File Name If you choose the Automatic File Name option 1 e if the option box is checked then the File Name text box is dimmed and the name is automatically assigned by the system based on the date month day number and time hour minute of the recording session Example 12240929 for a file recorded on December 24 at 9 29 a m WinComm Utility Programmable GPS recorder If you do not select the Automatic File Name option then you can enter a name of your own Unless a maximum size is selected for the file you are also allowed to enter an extension Add Request This button saves the recording session description currently displayed and increments the number of programmed sessions that appears at the bottom of the scrollbar This automatically selects the Automatic File Name option and prompts the next possible session consid ering the specified duration Delete Request This button deletes the recording session description cur rently displayed and decrements the number of programmed sessions that appears at the bottom of the scrollbar Run Program This button activates the Programmable GPS Recorder mode First a new dialog box appears in which you can specif
121. drop down menu attached to this field is not restricted to the set of attributes displayed in the table Indeed you can choose any attribute from the concerned collection Once you have chosen the attribute select the sorting direction by check ing the corresponding button Ascending or Descending opposite the field Table Properties E x Data Sot Order by C Ascending Descending Ascending C Descending Ascending C Descending Through the same above 2 steps you can define a second even a third sorting attribute with decreasing priority They will take effect only if the higher priority attribute fails to sort the objects For example if the first higher priority sorting attribute equals 25 for a number of objects in the table then GNSS Studio will use the second sorting attribute to sort these objects etc Reference Working in a Time Document Working in a Time Document Time documents are principally used to show observation files versus time They are very useful in post processing applications It does not make sense to base the definition of a time document on any collection other than the dat ed collections namely Points Files Stops and vectors Note that the default Time view document gives an exhaustive view of your observation files The first 5 buttons from the map toolbar can be used when a Time document is active in the View pane kaaa
122. ds tab then on the Process topic bar and then on the Clear Process Results icon equivalent function on the menu bar Project gt Clear Process Results GNSS Studio will then delete all the baseline processing results which will then disappear from the var ious open documents 117 Working in a Land Survey Project LJ Performing Adjustment You do not need to select anything in the project before running this com mand as GNSS Studio will automatically run this command on the entire project taking into account the possible changes that you have made on some points Typically you may have fixed some points horizontally vertically or both to anchor your field survey to known points You may also have cleared the Enabled button for some of the computed vectors in order to reject them from the adjustment phase see Editing a Vector on page 141 Press the F7 key or in the Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Adjustment topic bar and then on the Adjust Network icon equivalent function on the menu bar Project gt Adjust Network GNSS Stu dio will then run the last saved processing scenario The results will then appear in the various open documents Ifyou do not change the legend defined on the Survey view map docu ment for adjusted vectors then you will get the following colors to qual ify the vectors e Green QA test was successful for these vectors e Red QA test failed for these vectors 118
123. e The lower table allows to define your control points BEFORE importing the files These can only be one of the points derived from the files present in the upper table After you select a point in the first cell Name cell press the Tab key to edit the properties of the control point These properties are derived from the corresponding data file You can edit these properties For example you can Change its coordinates if you know the true values of some or all of its coordinates Define its type 1 e which of the coordinates are accurately known hence 1D 2D or 3D In the Control cell select Ver for 1D Hor for 2D and Hor amp Ver for 3D Fix some of its coordinates 1 e force GNSS Studio to keep the coordinates you supply for this point rather than allow it to deter mine these coordinates through post processing You usually fix a control point when you provide all or part of its true coordinates In the Fixed cell select blank to not fix the control point Hor to fix it horizontally Lat Lon or X Y Ver to fix it vertically Elev Height or Hor amp Ver to fix all its coordinates Later on in the process you will be able to define new control points by click ing on the Define Control Points icon in the Process topic 110 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Add Raw Data button allows you to add more files to the upper table without having to resu
124. e Upload Positions to External Device x Device Zmax data collector Control amp Waypoints 6500 data collector 6000 PC card Transter As job Selected Targets and References TUTO 0g e E a ea Sta i A All Targets and References In order of Hame 7 Director CAM y Projects sT uto_1 job a a W White feature code list file az well Cancel 18 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Accept all the defaults by simply clicking OK This opens the following dialog box asking you to connect and run the field terminal which was done at the beginning of this step and to specify the conditions of trans fer Automatic or not Default Automatic Keep the default selection Data Transfer E a X Connect your field terminal to your PE On your field terminal launch the Data Transfer utility Then press OF when ready m 3 m e pa m N W Automatic transfer Cancel Click OK A number of messages are displayed in turn denoting transfer in progress Retrieving directory listing File transfer complete ki Should GNSS Studio fail to connect to the field terminal please resume the above procedure in Manual Mode i e clear the Automatic transfer check box when GNSS Studio displays the above dialog box This will open the SurvCom dialog box You will then be able to check the PC port settings cf Options but ton and resume data transfer
125. e Antenna pane Displays the following parameters Antenna height for the static occupation selected in the Time pane above Height Type Type of measurement used to measure the antenna height slant vertical true for the static occupation selected in the Time pane above Q Editing a Point Although point properties may take various forms and meanings depending on context and point type they however all comply with the same box layout as shown below Typically to open this dialog box double click any point displayed in the active map document 138 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Point Name Description 1 Layer r Comment s 3 Control Survey Errors Y v Total Error 2 1 1 l 4 Lat Lat J B B 7 O oO O Cancel 1 This area shows the type and name ofthe point as well as its description the layer it belongs to and a possible comment attached to the point All point types contain these properties 2 This area provides the control coordinates uncertainties of the point as well as the name of the coordinate system in which these coordinates are expressed The field containing the name of the coordinate system is set by the software itself 139 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project What control coordinates basically are depends on the point type Foracontrol point
126. e to less than one centimeter In addition surveyors using this method will only obtain local coordinates for their surveyed points whereas the first method would provide both WGS84 and local coordinates Choosing a method rather than the other then only depends on whether you need the true WGS84 coordinates for the surveyed points or not Tutorial 1 will also be the opportunity for you to discover what a back ground map project is and how it can advantageously be combined with a land survey project to present the results in the most pertinent and attractive fashion Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 1 Creating a New Project To start the program from the Windows task bar select successively Start Programs Thales Navigation and GNSS Studio tea CE Download Sd SNP to RINE ga Geoids FS Programs rat GNSS Download Documents j GNSS Studio a Eh Settings a Internet Download 3 W Search Mission Planning ae Help mP RINES Converter F Run a THALES Navigation A F WinComm Bp Shut Down Start The Welcome dialog box then opens I x What would you like to do Open an existing project pa Open the last project you worked on x Run without a project Don t show this dialog again 11 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click on Create a new project The New dialog box then opens in which the Projects tab and the Land Survey Pr
127. e Spatial Reference System field select lt New gt in this list then select SELECT a PRE DEFINED system click the Next gt button select FRANCE then FRANCE NTF Lambert zone I and finally click Fin ish 31 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click on the OK button twice The new background project is then created in the open workspace and the following dialog box is displayed What would you like to do next Import Raster Background from Image File LI Step 12 Importing a Vector Layer In this step you will have to use the GNSS Studio installation CD ROM that you have already inserted in the computer s CD drive Click on the Import Vector Layers from ESRI Shape Files button This causes the Browse dialog box to appear From the Look in combo box select the following folder on the GNSS Studio CD ROM Samples Maps Vector Select the file stored in this folder and click Open 32 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey As a result the vector layer is imported as a new collection in the project its name now appears on the Workspace pane in the Collections tab FRANCE NTF Lambert zone Il 3 m e pa m AN pp D0000 m 0 oo Z oO 500000 00 1000000 0 If you now look at the content of the Documents tab in the Workspace pane you will note the presence of this new project in the workspace This project contains a map document called
128. e active view Q Redefining a specific moment in the prediction For all views on which the X axis represents the total duration of prediction the specific moment see Defining a moment within the prediction on page 192 is denoted by a marker a down arrow This marker may be shifted towards the beginning or the end of the predic tion using one of the following methods Whatever the method you use the Current Time dialog bow will always be updated following this operation 1 By directly clicking inside the graph where you would like the marker to be located 204 Mission Planning Utility Changing the prediction options 2 Using the following buttons on the toolbar Click on to move the marker one step forward Or Click on al to move the marker one step backward 3 Using the following buttons on the keyboard A short press on the key numeric keypad will move the marker one step forward A long press will cause the marker to move for ward until you release the key A short press on the key numeric keypad will move the marker one step backward A long press will cause the marker to move backward until you release the key The specific moment in the prediction can also be changed on the At Time or Polar views using the 2nd or 3rd method described above Changing the prediction options LI Deselecting satellites Click on 2a or on the menu bar select Options gt Svs A dialog b
129. e are inactive and you cannot change to another Mode Load Program This button opens a dialog box that allows you to select a file typically a pgm file containing descriptions of planned recording sessions saved earlier using the Save Program button Select the desired file name and click Open Save Program This button opens a dialog box that allows you to save descriptions of planned recording sessions so that they can be used at a later date using the Load Program button Enter a name into the File Name text box and click Save Print Program This button opens a Print dialog box that allows you to print the descriptions of planned recording sessions currently loaded O Z 233 WinComm Utility WinComm shortcut WinComm shortcut You can save your customary communications settings to a configuration file and specify the configuration file name in the command line of any shortcut created to start WinComm As a result the configuration file will automatically be loaded and enabled when you double click the WinComm icon to start Win Comm in that case the Communication Settings dialog box will not be prompt ed To create a WinComm shortcut icon that will automatically load one of your customary communications configuration files do the following With the mouse right button click outside any window in the workspace From the menu that pops up select New then Shortcut This opens the Cre ate Shortcut dialog
130. e desired options and also to be reg istered as a GNSS Studio user write down your personal code displayed in third line in dialog box above and then click on the web link If your PC is equipped with a connection to the Internet you will be able to access our web site to make your request From the personal code you will send us we will be able to generate a password for you Once you get it type in this password in the lower edit box see dialog box above and then click OK This unlocks the software option s you have pur chased thus making it them available for use 4 7 1 Introduction to GNSS Studio Installation 8 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Chapter 2 Tutorials Total average time required to complete the 3 tutorials 90 minutes The first tutorial introduces notions and elements of the software that are not repeated in Tutorials 2 and 3 For this reason reading Tutorial 1 first is highly recommended Tutorials 2 and 3 can then be read in any order Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey m 3 m e pa m AN Average time required to complete this tutorial 40 minutes Q Preamble With this tutorial you will learn how to use GNSS Studio before and after a real time survey The survey example includes staking out and point logging operations In this example the target and reference points are not created in the project although this would be possible using the map toolbar
131. eceeeeeeeeensseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 189 Defining the date amp time Of prediction cccccccccccccecccesssseeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeens 191 Defining a moment within the prediction cccccecceccceeeeesseesstseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Defining the local UTC time deviation 0 0 0 0 ccccccccceeeeeeseesssseceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeenas 193 Prediciion re UGS cacescies aieegicciss nase senate pent teeechenaset cen osoceieencanscnces eae noenenmentaceeateeshates 194 Gi SARE sheeted E nasetne eaten ee dase eb eect etree ee ees 195 Oe eoe Me ol ou deeeneneern peeenr a A ertre ewer 196 saa reece testes erase ase as inion EE 197 NT I Vy aaa ceases ca seste hes dont perder esata ges aa eso asters toned ace tam aenteacecuntos 198 G cT evan eka cic anaes N A E A 199 A 1 seca E O EE E egonse ees seaaaes 200 a Poln ata araca a er eran caterer eer 201 i DOP va lt 3 canner ene en Re ere ee eee eee eee ee 202 LI Displaying 4 or 2 different views at the same time cccccccccssceceesseeeessseeeesteeeeens 203 LI Copying or printing the active VICW ccccccccsssccesssccecesseecesseeceesseeeeesseecesseeeeeseeeeeess 204 LY Redefining a specific moment in the prediction cccccecsscceessceeeessseceesseeeeesseeeenas 204 Changing the prediction Options cccccccccccccccceccsssssseeesssseeeeeeeeceesesesseeesssaeaees 205 Q Deselecting Sate Ite Sic accuccessorcedevasesndedenensnsand ondninikelendaneiienaeehatgud on saeinn ceebanan
132. eceiver command in GNSS Stu dio Downloading data from the Z Max receiver can be performed according to one of the following two methods Via the USB port Via serial port fs It is recommended to use the USB port rather than a serial port as this connec tion offers a faster transmission speed up to 50 kB s for USB only 10 kB s for a serial port A third method also exists in which you have to remove the SD card from the Z Max receiver and insert it into the SD card reader installed in your PC This method is the fastest one as the data is routed directly from the SD Card to the Download module but you need an SD card reader on your PC 105 7 O oO O 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The diagram below summarizes the three download methods and also shows the cases where you need the Download module and those where you need the SurvCom module ra a ad A SurvCom Toos RoR Toos RoR 7 iam 7 Max Receiver Download Down loag ial z o USB port E SD Card Handheld computer Office PC 1 Direct from SD Card 2 Via USB Por or serial port DownLoad Data 1 SD Card Reader To download data from the SD card installed in the Z Max do the following Power on the receiver and connect it to the Office PC via USB port On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Download Raw Data from Receiver This starts the Download utility program and opens its
133. ech Files to RINEX Format 15 Complete the fields in the Met dialog box The information entered in the Met dialog box is stored in the meteorological data file The table below describes each field Description Station Name Name of the survey point or station where data was collected Agency Creating Current File Name of the company or agency that converted the data to RINEX Sonne Any comments pertaining to the station data quality cover GPS GLO NASS etc 50 character limit Meteorological Date and time atmospheric data was collected atmospheric pressure tem Data List perature relative humidity and ZWET Zenith Wet Tropospheric Delay Edit Click this button to open the Edit dialog box and edit the selected meteorological data line 16 Click Edit to open the Edit dialog box and inspect or change the meteoro logical data ee Date Time ip Oe Be et fama fio fis fa fiz F l 1010 0 20 0 50 0 0 0 Pressurefmbs Dry Temp C Rel Hum ZwWET mm 278 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 17 Enter the meteorological data the date and the UTC time that the data was taken and click OK The table below describes the fields in the Edit dialog box Description Date The year month and date that the data was recorded D is the day of the month not Julian day the data was recorded The time the data was recorded H is the hour of the day
134. ecting the UTC HH MM SS option in the Zone field and then by entering the value of time deviation in the HH MM SS field shown just below Click OK to complete the definition Dialog box allowing you to define the local UTC time deviation Time Zone x Zone az a 5 e va UoISSIN Zh fmol 3s ea 12h fm ss 193 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results Prediction results Prediction results are provided in the form of graphs called views Apart from the At Time and Polar views all the views use an axis system with the prediction time span represented along the X axis a linear scale is used and each graduation represents 1 10th of the total prediction time span Along the Y axis are represented the possible values of the displayed parameter which may be one of the following On Schedule View SV No 1 to 32 AND No of visible satellites On Range View distance from 20 000 to 26 000 km On Doppler View Doppler from 1000 to 1000 m s On Elevation View Elevation angle from 0 to 90 On Azimuth View azimuth angle from 0 to 360 On DOP View DOP from 0 1 to 100 logarithmic scale The Polar view uses polar coordinates as suggested by its name The At Time view provides numerical data for one given moment chosen in the prediction To select a view Select View gt View Name or after placing the mouse cursor anywhere within the display zone choose it
135. ectly in this box 7 Check the Format Body radio button All the fields that can be inserted into the format body are now listed in the Field Selection list box 8 Follow the instructions from points3 to 5 above to create the format body The instructions mentioned in the dialog box are an alternative to the procedure described above 9 Click OK to save the newly created format The name of the new format is now listed on the right in the initially selected dialog box Import or Export Working in a Background Map Project The essentials of background map projects are presented in Tutorial 1 steps 12 through 14 An important thing to remember about backgound map projects is that all the collections you import into a background project are necessarily assigned the same coordinate system which is the project s coordinate system This is due to the fact that layers are not explicitly tied to a coordinate system before you import them Conversely if you want any two collections to use two dif ferent coordinate systems then you will have to create two background projects One will be defined with the first desired coordinate system and the other with the second coordinate system Then you will have to import each collection into the suitable background project 7 O oO O O You can however group all your background map projects in the same work space and create a map document in one of these projects in whi
136. eeesseecessseccessseecesssseeeesseeeeseeeeens 56 A Step Oe Creatine a REDON aascessasca crue stcscaceca sien ia a a aai iii 58 Q Step 7 Closing the PLO SA ox dvececsrvexetexaccceickcaetetersevetsmnradac ves ceunssaeesteriaeedansiestenaiencies 59 GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network ccccsssssccecceeeeeeeeeeesesssseeeaees 60 PE AP TN e A AE AEE EE 60 Q Step l Creatine A mg 6 0 o Seen nee ee ne ee ee ee 61 LY Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data ccccccccsccesscccessseceessseecessseeeeesseeeessaes 62 L Step 3 Analyzing the project content after Download c cccccccccesseceeesseeceenseeeeees 66 LY Step 4 Creating a Map Showing the Precision Results ccccccccsscceessseeeesseeeensaes 69 ll Step 5 Exporting Data to a File gigeccanscusisaen vavcaowacpaswusnswasenintuiedee iasunisesedsuanswesesevosesanncers 12 Q Step 6 Creating a Report cccccccsscccesscceessseccessseccessseceessseccsssseceseseeeeesasecessaseseesaes 74 LY Step 7 Closing the project cccccccccscccccssscccsseeceessseecesssecessssececssseeceseeceesseesecsseeeeesaes 74 Chapter 3 IReleremee icisssscrssseseiaciusistncctinexireieincivnicemincnnitiniainvawen 1D Taf OC GLO pase epee reer E E EEE DD E Sane GNSS SUG eai aaa a a E Grace eE 75 LY Description of the Main Window cccccccccssscceessceccesseececsseecesseccesseecessseeeeesseecensaes 75 LY Quitting GNSS
137. el cccccccccccccccesesesessssnneeeeeceeceeceseeesesssaeeeeeeeeeees 241 Displaying the Versions of the Available Geoid Formats cc c cccccccceceeeees 242 Delene a CC OIG model orecreea a 242 Chapter 7 Download UDIY sisson 243 odU O a e i 243 Dare POS E 244 GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Downloading Data From a ReCeivet cccccessssecceeececeeceesesesesnseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 245 Chapter SUFVC om UO GUMY ccscesssccsassscrssesavsieareserscccitesnmssersedasssiariatecssuveesaeds 253 Launching Sut y COM sic cesaciccacasedncezaieiecccnddicdadcatexctdncenaietiaaiinadiaiid acceded 253 Bury om Main Window coscssconsinsacraaacninnncaboeacticentabeeunecttnctinsamsranxiandcaieebsnisaneients 255 OMS AAG e EN ER 256 Chapter 9 RINEXA CONYETICT isisisi aiaiai 261 Preliminaty Operations eet ccccaaneeseiaee aes caceiied dant erR EEEE EEEE EAEAN ESR 261 Sarane RINEN Conyerne a es ee E ee aN ieee 262 Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format 0 ccccccccsesssseceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeessseeeaees 264 Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Formatt cccccsssccccececeeeeeeeeeeeesssseeaes 269 Batch Processi iE oeiia a Eaa 280 Chapter I0 DIR Winey ernn 281 PANO EEEE TA A EE A A E E E N E ET 281 mE Va Med E E E AEEA O A AEEA E ATA A sees 281 O Time labeling iain n a er ene eee eee 281 G Naming ihe oupi eS eree o E ona ema ees 282 Usne DIR a A E E eee ae eer tee 283 Q Description of the main window c cccccsccce
138. ence Working in a Graph Document Click OK The Graph Properties dialog box now shows two items on the Legend tab Graph Properties E Legend View va Points v 4 Points Click OK Two curves are now plotted on the graph with different colors one for the horizontal precision the other one for the height precision Both use the same X axis 7 O oO z O O Index 0 Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index Q Zooming in on a Graph Drag horizontally along the X axis on the graph The selection resulting from the drag operation appears in black Index 0 Index 1 181 3 Reference Working in a Graph Document When you release the mouse button GNSS Studio zooms in on the selected region in order to show this region using the total width of the graph document Index 1 Index To come back to normal size right click anywhere on the graph docu ment and select Zoom Out on the pop up menu 182 Mission Planning Utility Introduction Chapter 4 Mission Planning Utility Introduction Mission Planning allows you to know which GPS satellites should be visible from a given observation point on the surface of the Earth and for a given period of time max 24 hours The World Map editor see below allows you to quickly define an observation point az a 5 jul e va UoISSIN Mission Planning uses almanac data sent by GPS satellites to perform a
139. ent had determined based on the size of the observation residuals that the observation uncertainties should be 2 times larger than they are currently stated to be If the computed Standard Error of Unit Weight is 0 5 then the observation uncertainties should be 2 times smaller than they are currently stated to be Why is this important For two reasons 1 Many of the tools used to analyze the quality of the adjustment are statis tically based For them to work properly the observation uncertainties going into the adjustment must be realistic 1 e close to the real uncer tainties The Standard Error of Unit Weight computed from a blunder free adjustment gives an indication of the quality of the observation uncertainties If the Standard Error of Unit Weight is much greater than or smaller than 1 this is an indication that the observation uncertainties are not realistic Fortunately GNSS Studio automatically compensates for this problem All post adjustment statistics used to measure the qual ity of the adjustment utilize the computed value for the Standard Error of Unit Weight to automatically compensate for unrealistic uncertainties No action on the part of the user is required 317 1 2 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools 2 A great deal of effort went into ensuring that the vector processing of GNSS Studio assigned realistic uncertainties to the processed vectors But since this is not yet an exact science there are conditions t
140. ent in the project A pure static observation is represented as a single segment covering the overall observation time For a dynamic observa tion file several segments are represented successively on the same hori zontal line Each segment represents a static occupation time The space between any two segments represents the time during which the rover was being moved from a point to another The bold dark blue segment represents the static occupation selected in the Time pane see below 137 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Clicking E in the right upper corner will maximize the graphic area on the PC screen for maximum reading comfort Using the pop up menu that you can have access to by right clicking anywhere on the graphic area you can zoom in or out on the diagram Once you have zoomed in several times you can also browse the diagram horizontally using the Panoramic command also available from the pop up menu Time pane Shows two fields The first one lists the start times of all the static occupations detected in the file Selecting a different static occupa tion in this list updates the graphic area to show the corresponding seg ment in dark blue The second field indicates the duration of the selected static occupation Stop pane Displays the following parameters Observation filename non editable Site ID associated with the static occupation selected in the Time pane above Description ofthis sit
141. er part of the View pane and occupies all the width of the GNSS Studio main window for the dis play of a maximum of columns at a time The Output pane 3 contains message lines that attest to the different operations you run in GNSS Studio in the present step data import If you close this pane GNSS Studio will open it automatically when the functions you run in GNSS Studio result in user messages sent to this pane The Output pane will then automatically close after a software set timeout LI Step 4 Uploading the Job to the Surveying Device Before running this step connect the Z Max data collector to your office computer via a serial line and switch it on If you do not have a data collector available do not worry Just skip step 4 as this step is not necessary to com plete tutorial 1 On the data collector launch the FAST Survey software Make sure the selected Com port is the one you are actually using Select the File tab then the Data Transfer function and then the SurvCADD Carlson Survey Trans fer function The data collector screen should then display File Transfer Utility Awaiting Connection 17 3 m e pa m AN Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey On the GNSS Studio side in the Workspace pane click successively on the Commands tab the Export topic bar and then the Upload Positions to External Device icon In the dialog box that opens make the following choic
142. ermined by the program GNSS Studio will refer to this parameter to know how to respond If the button is checked the processing scenario will be updated automatically If the button is cleared GNSS Studio will prompt you to update the scenario which you can accept or reject The Save As Defaults button allows you to save the current settings in this dialog box as the default settings for any new project that you will create later on 3 Project Settings Feature Code List tab This tab allows you to define a list of feature codes for the project These fea ture codes will be uploaded to the surveying system as part of the job and are intended for field operators In the Z Max data collector feature codes are saved as FCL files 7 O oO O O O 99 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Feature Code List tab contains the following buttons Tuto_2 Project Settings 4 x Region Miscellaneous Feature Code List Code FullText Layer Polline Polline Street lights using 100 W bul 100W SL Save s Defaults New button opens the New Feature Code dialog box from which you can define a new feature code GNSS Studio will then add the feature code you define to the list of existing feature codes See explanations on the next page Load button allows you to load a fcl file containing a list of feature codes that you wish to use in the project Save button al
143. ervation point for it to be used in the prediction Mission Planning Utility Changing the prediction options Minimum Elevation dialog box Elevation Min x Elev Min FO Q Applying removing the curtain Click on S or on the menu bar select Options gt Use curtain A dialog box opens in which you can apply button depressed or remove button released the curtain defined on the observation point The curtain which is part of the observation point definition see Defin ing the observation point on page 189 describes an angular area seen from the point All GPS signals received from that area will NOT be used The presence of the curtain size and shape shown on the Polar view impacts most of the other views in the prediction az a 5 jul e va UoISSIN 207 Mission Planning Utility World Map editor World Map editor The World Map editor shows the planet Earth From this view you can select any point on the surface of the Earth where you would like to run a predic tion The World Map editor is equipped with a number of functions allowing you to access this point Example of a view obtained with the World Map editor LI Rotating the Earth If the visible part of the World Map editor does not show the desired obser vation point do the following Position the mouse cursor anywhere on the globe Right click on the mouse and select Grabber The mouse pointer now looks like th
144. ervation uncertainties are too pessimistic too large 3 A computed value significantly larger than 1 is also an indication of an imbalance between the observation residuals changes and observation uncertainties Specifically one or two problems exist with the adjust ment Either one or more blunders exist in the observations causing the observation residuals to be much larger than the observation uncertain ties or the observation uncertainties are too optimistic too small To fully comprehend the significance of a Standard Error of Unit Weight be ing significantly smaller or larger than 1 it is first imperative that any obser vation blunders that may exist in the observations be removed from the adjustment 316 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Later in this chapter you will find additional tools that are specifically de signed to isolate blunders With the absence of blunders in the network ob servations the magnitude of the Standard Error of Unit Weight can be examined to determine its significance gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN In a blunder free adjustment the magnitude of the Standard Error of Unit Weight the magnitude of the disagreement between the uncertainties associ ated with the observations and what the adjustment determines should be the observation uncertainties For example if the Standard Error of Unit Weight is computed to be 2 and the adjustment is blunder free the adjustm
145. eseeesteeeesees 104 LY Downloading Data From the Z Max REeCeIVeP ccccceeseccesssceeeessceecesseecessseeeeeseeeeenas 105 LY Importing Data from Files ccc cccccccesscccesseeceessceecessceecessseccesseeeeesseecesseeceseeeeens 108 CI Importing Positions From Piles ick aciceciseseosesseeeoarceeaduensdeveseunderswcaceancdssaescdernusoseasesennsies 112 LY Checking the Processing Options ccccccccssscecessceeeesseeccesseeceesseeecesssecesseeeecseeeeeens 113 LI Processing Baselines ccccccccsssccessseccessscceecsseecessseccesseecessseccesseeceeeseeesessseesesseeeeess 116 O Clearmg PROCESS Results ususani ia ria an 117 Q Performing Adjustment sesseesseseenssseessereeseesseresssrrrsssresssresseresrsresssressnressneesseresss 118 G Clearing Adustment Resuli cscscsn cxsccdmnnacicsareogesareounartaca mam Gan enen ane 119 C Checking Loop Closure si iciccssscicsossesacevatecisiedtvesseccgecusdesawscea aduaddovegsnadestuntavscasesexesevecbic 120 LI Editing the Feature Code List cccccccsssccccssscccsssseceesseeecesseeecesseeccesssseceesseeeeesaeeeeens 122 GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents A Sotme Feature COES ricaccianni denara a aaiae daaa NA Eaei iais 122 LY Processing Feature Codes ccccccccscccssseccesssceecesseeccseeceecseeececsssecessseeceesseeeeessaeeseaees 123 LY Performing Coordinate Calibration 0 ccccccccccssscccssscceeesseecessseccessseeeecsseecesssseeesaees 125 Q Computing Datum Sh
146. esesssessssneaeeeeeeeeeees 315 LY Network Connectivity Test ccccccccccccsscccessscceecsseeccsseeceecsseecessseecessseeceesseeeeessaeeesaees 315 Q Variance of Unit Weight Standard Error of Unit Weight 0 cccccceccseeesseeeeseeeees 315 TS ee SG eierne a r aE E EE e r a 318 Q Observation Residuals scsicssceveisisnscasavecangsad ccavejetinoasteenssaveatdastoceuesattave asorgsiaveesoua aavekuns 319 ER 2 al E pee a E eee eee ee eee 323 LY Loop Closure AnalySis ccccccccscccessscceessscccesseececssseccessseecessueccessseececsseecessaseceesseecensaes 324 I Repeat vedor ANIES onera E 325 T Control Tie Analysis cise osccavse tscecdesesate saacces AEE REEN AAAA 326 Usinge Datumi C010 S assisiircitioisoedsosorstinenieionisiena taiea aiaa aieiaiei ie a iinit 327 Database in a Land Survey Project 0 ccccccccceesssseceeeeeeeeeeeesesesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 328 A Files ise carts crsst gen anea od oceans A ANETES 328 ET Processes CONG CIIOI scasse s csaredestnnaitavestevw gotnansachoausdaatceaaneanavaverareussteaee dtaaxgoaansaeon waniaders 328 A Stops UD ici ga ce ese sacra ves acs esas dass ses es esas te 329 GI Areas 8 1610101 1 een ne Oe er eee 329 A Lines 0 fc soo en eee nee en E Te eee 329 J Poin cs esse aaa ceacsecc seers shears sisson A A A AAi 330 GI Vectors Collection cn casecusiuarciudsnscaiaveciaoeastnnnsasesnaniantcasadeananyiestaasiieakesamrasoecaunsadaetess 331 EY Repeat Vectors Collectioti seissiiisirriairisrissrsisitssisdi
147. ettings x Region Miscellaneous Feature Code List m Blunder Detection m Quality Control Minimum vector time span 0o25 min Desired project accuracy Valid antenna height range Horizontal 0o20 m o ppm From 0 000 To 3000 m Vertical 0 040 m 2 ppm Maximum acceptable control error m Network Adjustment Confidence scaling factor fi Total 0 1 00 m Precise Orbit Files Path C Program Files Common Files THALES Navigation Orbit ane Default is Broadcast S a gt I Rebuild process scenario automatically on any change pa er fa Save As Defaults Apply Blunder Detection Define the two criteria required to run the Blunder Detection test Minimum amount of overlap time between observations Minimum vector before a vector is processed Enter a value in minutes time span default 5 minutes For example if this value is 15 sec onds enter 0 25 Lower and upper limits of the antenna height from the ground Enter these values in the selected unit Any antenna value outside this range is considered a blun der and displays with a warning Valid antenna height range From To 97 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Network Adjustment GNSS Studio allows you to weight the network adjustment results The Confidence scaling factor field can be used for this purpose Unless you are familiar with this parameter
148. f installed software applications Provides access to another dialog box allowing you to unlock software options after getting a password from Thales Navigation The password is tied to a personal code deduced from the computer hardware or to the dongle connected on the PC parallel port 345 1 2 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar 346 GNSS Studio User Manual Glossary Glossary Blunder Error made by the field operator during the survey causing glaring errors in survey results Not to be confused with uncertainties in system mea surements Connectivity A test performed during a network adjustment to see if all the points in the active project are linked together by measurements If that is the case the project passes the connectivity test Otherwise the test fails which means that the project contains two or more independent point networks in stead of a single one Datum An ellipsoid that is offset with respect to a reference ellipsoid usu ally the WGS84 A datum is therefore fully defined by providing the follow ing parameters an ellipsoid definition datum shifts i e angular amp linear components of the spatial deviation between the center of the ellipsoid and that of the reference ellipsoid and a scale factor Ellipsoid A mathematical representation of the Earth as an ellipse that is ro tated about its minor axis An ellipsoid is fully defined by providing the fol lowing two parameters semi major axis and inver
149. fied graph in the active graph document 337 12 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Q Map Menu Available only if a map document is active in the View pane 338 Select Selects one or more objects shown on the map Multiple selection is accomplished either by dragging the mouse cursor around the desired objects or by selecting the objects one after the other You have to hold down the Shift key to add new objects to the first selected object Zoom In Zooms in on the area where you click or drag Zoom Out Zooms out from where you click or drag Zoom To Fit Adjusts the map scale so that all the visible objects present on the map can be seen Grabber Shifts the map as instructed The map shift directly proceeds from the length and orientation of the segment you drag on the map Distance Measures the distance between two points that you indicate with the mouse To use this tool hold down the mouse button on the first point and then drag the mouse to the second point The tool then continually indicates the distance between the start point and the current position of the mouse cursor This function uses gravity to help you position the mouse cursor exactly on the two points points act as magnets that attract the mouse cursor when located in the vicinity Set Active Collection Allows you to choose the type of object you want to place on the map equivalent to using the combo box on the Map toolbar Draw Points Allows you to ad
150. fined is now displayed In this Layer Wizard Data dialog box enter an alias for the layer For exam ple type Signs in the Alias field Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Then click the Next gt button The Layer Wizard Style dialog box now opens Make the following choices in this box Layer Wizard Style Ea Iv Text Name Mu olr eee M Back Cdr ore IV Symbol ES MV Line a MF Cr J Nomal C Selected 3 m e pa m AN Eo Click the Finish button You should now obtain the following information on the ResultMap map document 4 300000 00 pr 250000 00 Ba 200000 00 gt aw 00 300000 00 350000 00 43 2 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Ifyou repeatedly draw a rectangle around the points after selecting the zoom in button you should get a view of the working area like this one k The order in which layers are listed in the Legend tab of the Map Properties dialog box impacts the way layers are superimposed on the map The mechanism is summarized in the figure below Hap Properties Legend View Wa Signs W Carquefou Wa 44 Carguetou H J Signs To display the legend right click anywhere on the map and select Legend 44 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey As shown above the first layer in the list is brought to front the last one is sent to back Intermediate layers occup
151. formal Conic 27 Oblique Mercator 27 Transverse Mercator 27 Transverse Mercator Alaska 27 Transverse Mercator OSTNO2 projection grid Oblique Stereographic RD2000 projection grid Ground System Transverse Mercator 34 Cassini Soldner Oblique Mercator 83 80 Reference Coordinate Systems LI Selecting a Coordinate System for the Active Project If you create a new project and you do not define its coordinate system during the creation phase then GNSS Studio will automatically allocate the coordi nate system of the last open project to this new project To define the coordi nate system during the project creation phase click on the Modify Default Settings button in the New dialog box and then complete the Region tab Once the project has been created you can come back to the definition of the coordinate system by clicking on the Commands tab in the workspace pane then on the Project topic bar and then on the Project Settings icon Then click on the Region tab As explained elsewhere in the manual see Project Settings on page 95 you select the desired coordinate system for the project in the Spatial Reference System field Remember that the choice you make in this field is for the entire project but you will be allowed to choose a system specific to each document created within the project without affecting the present choice The list of systems attached to the Spatial Reference System field contains at
152. from the menu displayed after a right click on the mouse The following information is provided in each view subtitle Label amp XYZ coordinates of the observation point 1st line Prediction start amp end times 2nd line Validity date of the almanac data used in the prediction minimum eleva tion angle and presence or absence of a curtain 3rd line 194 Q At Time view Mission Planning Utility Prediction results The At Time view lists the positions of the visible satellites from the ob servation point for the moment chosen in the prediction Example of At Time view Predicted S s At Time At Site Biante 43 40 59 OOOOH 134 5 0000 2 022 m From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2007 Ev Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored Urn jun 6 2001 Sh Om Os GOOF 3D T 22 Gy J 15 17 18 15 2 oe 2d af 2 al Range ra 20682463 28 209287 22 69 22449457 55 221 41246 74 236537 4 00 22969514 13 20709059 10 225094386 45 24935568 44 2971 5060 50 220r 6456 40 Doppler rs 254 14 30 16 JET 207 46 31 54 18 73 315 11 EA 329 07 613 21 od 71 Az deg 305 3 a5 46 5 47 0 291 0 144 4 185 1 r99 321 6 313 0 205 9 Ev deq 63 1 Fd 33 6 30 5 ala Jaa 66 5 EPAI az 204 25 4 195 az 5 e tiel UoISSIN Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI
153. fter completing the definition of the obstruction zone and if you want to restore a 0 360 normal non shifted scale if appropriate choose the Select command from the pop up menu and then simply double click inside the chart area with the left hand mouse button Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor Q Editing a curtain manually After accessing the curtain editor chart Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the graph and click with the right mouse button Inthe shortcut menu that pops up select the Edit Curtain command In the dialog box that appears specify the points delimiting the obstruc tion zone s Edit Curtain X Point 2 2 Azimuth 24 deg Elevation a a deg Right from previous point Curtain Obstruction 1 Obstruction 2 Align with previous point Add Delete Insert Delete Curtain pane a z List box Shows the number of obstruction zones defined to form the cur a tain for the concerned site Obstruction zones are numbered from 1 to n The definition of the selected obstruction is shown in the right hand part ge of the box Add button Press this button to add a new obstruction zone in the above list box Delete button Press this button to delete the obstruction zone selected in the above list box 213 Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor Point x x pane 214 Azimuth Azimuth angle for the displayed point Elevation Elevation angle for the displa
154. g raw data files into the project database Use the Project gt Import Raw Data from Files on Disk command to import the files logged in the field Pllog bin P2log bin P3log bin Reflog bin The follow ing is then performed in the project database gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Inthe Points collection a new object is created for each imported file unless already existing Inthe Processes collection as simultaneous observations are found 3 objects are created to describe the following 3 baselines in our example RefP1 RefP2 RefP3 Before proceeding to the next step the operator has to enter the coordinates and attributes of the reference point 4th step Processing baselines Use the Project gt Process All Baselines command Choose the adequate mode static in this type of survey to perform this operation After the validation step the ultimate results are stored as objects in the fol lowing collections Vectors Points 5th step Adjusting network Vectors may be adjusted using Project gt Adjust Network if you want to attach the network to a reference point part of the survey and or if there is sufficient redundancy in the measurements In fact a certain amount of redundancy is highly desirable 307 1 2 Appendices Network Adjustment 6th step Analyzing results amp creating a report Use the Project gt Lan d Survey Report command to generate a project report
155. ght clicking anywhere in this area and making the desired choices on the pop up menu File pane Shows non editable parameters describing the observation filename GPS time at the beginning of the observation measurement type file size in bytes observation duration recording rate sampling in seconds Default Site pane Shows the following editable parameters ID of default site associated with the file Type of this site a point or a trajectory Default Antenna pane Shows the following editable parameters Default antenna height from the ground in the selected unit Height Type Default type of measurement used to measure the antenna height slant vertical true Default antenna type with the ability to edit the specifications of this antenna 136 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Occupations tab contains the following information Files BKINMA96 026 3 x File Occupations Files 4 i i i H 1 Time 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 1726 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 1 26 1996 08 10 08 20 08 30 08 40 08 50 09 00 Time Start Time Time Span January 26 1996 08 12 35 00 00 1 1 30 Stops Antenna File BKINMA6 026 Antenna Height 0 000 Site ID kin Height Type vetica x Description 12345678901234567890 7 Kinematic initialisation point using initializer bar 7 O oO O O Graphic area on top showing the time spans of all the observation files pres
156. hanges to this project these changes will also appear when you open this project in the original workspace GNSS Studio can only open a sin gle workspace at a time 343 12 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar LJ Tools Menu 344 Utilities list Each command allows you to launch the corresponding util ity program Coordinate Systems Provides access to the library of coordinate systems created in GNSS Studio Window fitted with powerful import export add edit and delete functions Test Transfo Launches a utility used to test coordinate transformations in a separate window You must specify the source and target coordinate systems Transformations can be run in one direction or the other which means the functions of target and source systems can be swapped between the two systems involved depending on the direction you choose for the transformation Leap Seconds Allows manual entries of days when leap seconds occurred or will occur you must also indicate the amount of leap sec onds GNSS Studio will take into account these leap seconds in the pro cessing of data collected during any of these days Test Time Opens the Test Time dialog box in which you can convert any GPS formatted time 1 e week seconds into local time day hours min utes seconds taking into account the specified local time zone GNSS antenna Provides access to the library of GNSS antennas In this library you can add ed
157. hat may cause the computed uncertainties to be too small or too large In most cases you should find that the computed Standard Error of Unit Weight falls between 1 and 3 In addition you should find that this value is rela tively consistent for similar types of surveys If you find that for most of your surveys the Standard Error of Unit Weight for a blunder free adjust ment is 1 5 and today you are working on an adjustment with a Standard Error of Unit Weight of 6 there probably is something wrong with the adjustment Q Chi Square Test The Chi Square test is a statistical test evaluating the computed value for the Variance of Unit Weight Its purpose is to determine if the computed value for the Variance of Unit Weight is statistically equivalent to 1 As stated ear lier a Variance of Unit Weight equal to indicates a balance between obser vation residuals and observation uncertainties It is very seldom that the computed value for the Variance of Unit Weight will exactly equal 1 But an exact value of 1 is not required The Chi Square test examines the computed value to determine if it is statistically equivalent to 1 If the test passes the computed value is considered equivalent to 1 318 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Due to the difficulties in computing observation uncertainties due to the many variables involved in many cases the Variance of Unit Weight will be larger or smaller than 1 This causes the Chi Square test
158. he datum Coordinate System Wizard Datum Ed Datum Name m f ElipsoidName WGS84 Semi major Axis 6378137 000m Inverse Flattening 298 257223563 DXtowased 0 00m DY towGS84 0 00m DZtoweses 0000m AXtowased 0 000000 tt RYtowased foooooo0o ts RZtowased 0 000000 tt Ktowased 1 000000000000 lt Back Cancel There are two different scenarios to define a datum for a new system 7 O oO O O The new system relies on a known datum just select a name from the list attached to the Datum name field The rest of the dialog box i e ellipsoid name and definition position in space is updated to match your selection The new system relies on an unknown datum type the name of the new datum in the Datum name field then type the name of the associ ated ellipsoid in the Ellipsoid name field Enter the two characteristics of the ellipsoid in the next two fields and then define the position in space of this ellipsoid with respect to the WGS 84 in the remaining 7 fields Note that the datum and the ellipsoid that you create in this second scenario are also intrinsically tied to each other 85 3 Reference Coordinate Systems When you have finished defining the datum click the Next button to dis play the next dialog box see below 2 Defining the projection x Projection Class 0D Transverse Mercator x EPSG projection 9807 thud of oigh oono Wi iol co
159. he format and insert a field In the Format Header or Format Body Double click to select a field Press Ctrl and double click to edit the format Field Selection Nesessesessenrnnessssenerssesensnnes C Format Body Format Body 152 2 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project To create a new custom format follow the instructions below 1 In the Name field enter a name for the new format In the Extension field just below this field enter the file extension 3 characters max default txt for the created file 2 Start with the definition of the header by checking the Format Header radio button All the fields that can be inserted into the header are listed in the Field Selection list box 3 Choose one of these fields from the list and click on the Insert button A new dialog box opens asking you to specify formatting instructions for this field Depending on the type of the field you will have to define its length width the number of decimal places if it s a numeric field its format if it s a date or time and possibly the associated text use t to insert a tab within the text box For example you can enter the following formatting instructions in this box after you have selected Project in the list 7 O oO O O O Width fiz Decimal places Format Text tab t f Surveyors t Cancel 153
160. he site where raw data was logged lt log_day gt log day in 3 figures 1 to 365 lt file_index gt a figure from 0 to 9 allowing you to create up to 10 dif ferent files for the same log date and the same site lt log_year gt log year in 2 figures example 2001 01 1998 98 lt type_code gt letter 0 for Observation file or N for Navigation file 282 DTR Utility Using DTR Using DTR LI Description of the main window These 3 fields are pre set automatically upon verted in this field Use the button on the right of this field to find the file on the computer disk selection of the file to be converted AN JIIDTR 4 00 a EI THALES INPUT FILE Raw Data File CAMY PR QJECTSSRAWDATAS Recorded On nov 14 2001 Marker Name SITE Marker Number Observer Name THOMAS Observer Agency orsu F Receiver Number hos H Receiver Type eas M Receiver Version e502 0 Antenna Number JaNToss5 Antenna Type NaPoo2 M RINE OUTPUT FILES Observation File CAMMY PROJECTS RAWDATAS ALU a Navigation File C MY PROJECTS RAWDATAS ZIN E E Automatic naming according to RINEX conventions Tr Ts 10 ms using instantaneous dopplers Go Close Optional parameters that are normally present in the header of a RINEX file As they are not present n the THALES format if you define them now in these fields they will be inserted into the RINEX ile when converting
161. ice f i x Click OK A new dialog box opens giving all the instructions to complete this upload operation Upload to ProMark a x Transfer i All Selected Points as Waypoints Fired points as Control points Connect your PROMARK2 to your com Turm it OM then press OF when ready IY Erase existing waypoints Cancel First choose whether you want to upload all the points from the project or only some of them If you have selected some of them before selecting this function Selected will be the default option 104 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Then connect the ProMark2 to one of your PC serial ports via a serial cable Turn on ProMark2 Back to the above dialog indicate the port used on the PC to connect the ProMark2 Default COM1 Choose whether you want to erase the existing waypoints in ProMark2 or not Check or clear the Erase existing waypoints button Click OK This uploads the waypoints to the ProMark2 according to your request GNSS Studio will automatically find the correct baud rate to communicate with ProMark2 Note that points are uploaded as way points and fixed control points are uploaded as control points Downloading Data From the Z Max Receiver The data logged on the SD Card during your field surveys can be download ed into a GNSS Studio project via the Download utility program see Chapter 7 using the Project gt Download Raw Data from R
162. ifts 0 0 0 ccccccccscccessscceessseecessseccesseeceesssecessaeeceesseeeeesseeeeessaes 127 T PoE aa E E AE EE A ET 128 Q Change Into Function cccccccsssccessssecesssecceesseeecessseccesseececcsseceesseeceesseeeeessaeecessaes 130 Q Grouping Points a c0cisasenssasusese9sesssaavesseerssscannsaseenustutsionardessdnducestonausaaassteiaseninsseenraaseness 131 LI Editing the definition of a collection 0 0 cece cccescccessseccesseeceeeseeeeesseecessseeeeenseeeesaes 132 LI Editing the Properties of an Object General Case ccccccccesscccsssecceesseeeeessseeessaees 133 El Eding an Observation File coi sasarsutcsetiencasrunee Guneelwan AT 135 a 26 a hg Poni ee een TEE 138 A Enie ay o ccc ge accesses oat scare iene naan aaedetie sa ec asacat aucune A E A 141 ED A a a clea cise eserves E a E 146 Er Edinge an AB nace caneeccaaiesc gan vottnnesiniisgopuygesessaaiantcasonanianwereraatiaavisieaanere ne eeatateds 147 A Exporting Data toa PG so casa csa ded ves aiten aaa Ea Eaa E ANTA aN 149 LI Creating a Survey Report ccccccccccccssseccesssceeeesseeccsseeeccesseeceessseceesseeceesseeeeessaeeesaees 149 A Creare Custom POP S seese anasto teense ane 151 Working in a Background Map Project cccccccssccccceccceccessesesesessseeeeeeeeeeeees 155 Working in a Map Document ccccccccccceseesssssnseeeeeeeeeeeesssesesesseeeseeeeeeeeeees 156 LI Creating a Map Document in an Open Project ceecccessscceessseeeesseeceessseeceesseeeesaae
163. ight it on the map when it is identified If the area is densely populated with objects and you click on this area GNSS Studio will open a new dialog box listing all the possible objects found in this area You can tell the software which object you would like to select 7 O oO O O O 161 3 Reference Working in a Map Document Below is an example of what this dialog box looks like Several objects fit your selection x Please choose items to be selected Points KIM l Selection type Add to current selection Replace current selection Cancel In this case just select the desired object in the list specify the selection type Add to Replace current selection and then click OK As previously mentioned GNSS Studio will then highlight the selected object on the map document so you can proceed k Ifyou zoom in sufficiently on the area before trying to select an object GNSS Studio will readily find the object without having to resort to the above dialog box 162 Reference Working in a Map Document Q Adding a New Layer to a Map Document As explained earlier representing any object from a collection in the project database requires the use of a ayer In any project that you create there is a number of default layers created by GNSS Studio itself However you can create as many layers as necessary for a given collection For example with points you can create as many types of layers
164. ii GPS Recorder c Advanced Help Display Simple Gps Recorder 2 Editing R lt Directory c program files gnss studio ra Ss File Name Record l Raw File Max Size No Limits x O Z ad gt Start Recording Pause Clear View Print View 217 A WinComm Utility Enabling communications with a GPS receiver Enabling communications with a GPS receiver After you start WinComm or click the Settings button in the WinComm main win dow the Communication Settings dialog box shows up This dialog box allows you to view and change the serial port parameters of your computer and en able communications with the GPS receiver connected to it Communication Settings Dialog Box Comm Cont E Auto Configure Speed jscc0 x Receiver Type Data bits fs f Parity Nore Stop bits itis Load Settings Save Settings You can save your customary communications settings to a configuration file using the Save Settings button and specify the configuration file name in the command line of any shortcut created to start WinComm As a result the con figuration file will automatically be loaded and enabled when you double click the WinComm icon to start WinComm in that case the Communication Set tings dialog box will not be prompted Use the combo boxes to set the communication parameters The parameters are preset to default values
165. in the on the map N the scale factor to be up project database This ob can be se dated to reflect the changes ject will then appear on the lected then produced map 1 Distance measurement expressed in the unit chosen for the project 156 Reference Working in a Map Document i The options available in the rightmost combo box as well as the point line and area buttons are available for the active map document ONLY IF the legend of this document contains the adequate layers For example to create a point at least one layer must exist that refers to the Points collection The same tools are available from the popup menu attached to the map document as well as from the Map menu on the GNSS Studio menu bar The mouse wheel combined with the following keys The mouse wheel used alone drags the map vertically upward or downward depending on the direction in which you rotate the wheel The mouse wheel combined with the depressed Shift key drags the map horizontally to the left or to the right depending on the direc tion in which you rotate the wheel The mouse wheel combined with the depressed Ctrl key zooms in or out on the map keeping the map s central point immobile You zoom in or out depending on the direction in which you rotate the wheel 7 O oO O The following keys on the numeric pad The key to zoom in The key to zoom out Q Adding an Object
166. ining all conversion activity When restarted RINEX converter overwrites the existing log file To save the old log file rename or move the file before restarting RINEX Converter The selected RINEX files are now in Ashtech format and can be used with data files from Thales Navigation receivers for post processing 268 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format RINEX Converter can convert Ashtech files from any GPS or GPS GLO NASS receiver using this format into RINEX format The following proce dure describes how to convert Ashtech files to RINEX format 1 Click the Ashtech to RINEX tab to switch to this tab Rinex Converter ERE an SME a lone E Baar ial Itc EAWANNT PROFLES PEZOSDDESKTOPY M j E ao Hep 269 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format The table below describes the fields in the Ashtech to RINEX dialog box Lists the files types Ashtech B Files B Ashtech E files E Ashtech S files File Types S or All files To select a file type click the arrow to the right of the field and select file type from the list presented This is the white area below File Types Lists files in current directory To select a file click on the file To select multiple files select the first file and then hold the Ctrl key while selecting additional files with the cursor Avai
167. ining the observation point Local Obstructions button This button provides access to the Curtain Edi tor which you can use if you wish to define a curtain around the observa tion point A default curtain exists which consists of all the space between 0 elevation and the minimum elevation angle above which sat ellites are used See Curtain editor on page 211 Load button Allows you to select an observation point saved earlier as a Pos file in order to use it as the current observation point Save button Allows you to save the current observation point as a Pos file stored in Pos directory for further use Dialog box allowing you to define an observation point Prediction Site 1 Site Dn the beach in Biarritz Lat 43 28 59 0000 N Long 1534 5 0000 w Alt 0 128 m Local Obstructions Load Save Cancel Curtain Editor World Map Editor 190 Use of Curtain Editor see Curtain editor on page 211 Use of World Map Editor see World Map editor on page 208 Mission Planning Utility Defining the date amp time of prediction Defining the date amp time of prediction When launching Mission Planning a prediction for the current date amp time is automatically computed The parameters defining a time of prediction are the date month year day and the start amp end times max observation time span 24 hours To define a new date amp time of prediction Click
168. ins the Ashtech files you wish to convert 4 Click Save to accept the directory and close the Set Input Directory dialog box 5 On the Astech to Rinex tab the Input Directory now shows the directory path and the Available Files list shows the list of Rinex files in the input directory Example Rinex Converter Ashtech B files B peie ETOTE 5H1311 940 B_asha94 131 BLASHAS413T E_ASHA94 131 S al A5H1311 94G 94G M M M j M Mei a 272 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 6 Select the file s you wish to convert to RINEX in the Available Files list You can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key while select ing files with the cursor and clicking the mouse button After selecting a file s to convert the B File E File S File Obs Nav Nav g and Met fields as applicable to the data in the file populate with sug gested file names If you selected multiple files the filenames listed are associated with the last file selected k To avoid confusion do not change the file names 7 Click Output dir to open the Set output directory dialog box Set Output directory ed ES Save in a RinexOut gt amp fad Save Files of Type RINEX FILES 0 n m g Y Cancel 8 Using standard Windows navigation procedure navigate to the directory where you want to store the converted files k To avoid
169. int or station where data was collected Observer Name or code of the surveyor who collected the data bii Name of the company or agency who collected the data AGENCY Creating Current File Name of the company or agency who converted the data to RINEX Any comments pertaining to the station data quality cover GPS GLO ommen NASS etc 50 character length limit RECEIVER INFORMATION Serial number of the receiver that collected the data Receiver Serial Check this box if you want all non mandatory fields to be filled in the RINEX All Optional Headers ije header ANTENNA INFORMATION Horizontal distance in meters that the antenna is offset from the marker in Offsets north m the north south direction is north is south Horizontal distance in meters that the antenna is offset from the marker in Offsets East m the east west direction is east is west True vertical distance in meters between the bottom of antenna and the Delta Vertical m taka Radius m Radius of the antenna in meters Measured distance in meters from the edge of the antenna to the marker Slant Distance m lf a value for an antenna are entered it over writes the values in the S file Type Type of antenna used in data collection Serial Serial number of antenna used for data collection 275 RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 12 Click Apply to save the changes made
170. io Presentation WinComm is used to communicate with a GPS GNSS Thales Navigation receiver directly from the PC to which it is attached via the set of propri etary commands available NMEA 0183 compatible From WinComm you can check modify the receiver settings configuration or run raw data recording sequences in manual or automatic mode awa N Sy ou r m e Geoids allows you to exploit all geoid models existing to date In practice you can use Geoids to extract part of the data from a geoid model accord ing to the geographical region you choose and load this data direct to the Thales Navigation receiver or data collector for further use in the field In this way any position fix performed in reference to the ellipsoid will be corrected through this model to give elevation GNSS Download is used to add raw data files to a project from a receiver or the computer s hard disk CEDownload SurvCom is used to perform data exchange between GNSS Studio and the data collector of the Z Max system This utility program allows data exchange in both directions of transfer RINEX Converter is used to translate single or multiple RINEX formatted data files to Thales Ashtech formatted files and alternatively convert Thales Ashtech data files to RINEX format DSNP to RINEX DTR is used to convert Thales raw data files DSNP SBIN SVAR SFIX into RINEX compatible files for further use in any othe
171. ion 132 Collection tab 77 Combining Survey results and vector raster im ages 38 Command pane 224 Commands Editor dialog box 225 Commands tab 75 77 78 Compute Datum Shifts 342 Confidence scaling factor 98 Connect To receiver 248 Connectivity Test 315 Control point 128 Coordinate Calibration 125 342 Coordinate systems 80 Attached to map document 83 Attached to table document 84 Defining system data 87 Geocentric 88 Geographic 88 Management 89 Pre defined 82 Projected 84 Copy selected file 247 Curtain 186 207 211 212 Custom Formats 151 D Database 76 Datum definition 85 Datum grids 327 DBP 333 Default documents list 91 Delete document from project 91 Deleting a line or an area 131 D file 244 Disk space 247 Distance meter 156 Documents tab 77 349 GNSS Studio User Manual Index Dongle 5 Doppler view 198 Download data from SD Card 105 Downloading Field Results 103 DTR 281 E E file 244 EGM96 235 Elevation view 199 Ellipsoid definition 85 Ephemeris data 263 ESRI 1 F FCL file 260 Feature Code tab 99 File mask 247 Filter 164 173 FLD file 260 Formats Export 149 Import 108 112 G GDOP view 202 Geoid model 3 Geoid models 235 Geoid99 235 GGF97 235 GGR99 235 GIS 1 GLONASS data 264 GNSS antenna 344 Gph 333 GR3DF97A 327 Graph documents 92 179 GRD 235 Grid coordinates 17 91 Group Label 225 350 Grouping Points 131 GSD95 235 I Import new geoi
172. ion on the left In the Project name field type a name for the new project For example type in Tuto 3 New Projects Workspaces Project name Land Survey Project Background Maps Project Tuto 3 m e pa p AN i Create new workspace Add te curent workspace IY Use default settings Modify Default Settings Click on the Modify Default Settings button In the new dialog box that appears select WGS 84 as the spatial reference system to be used in the new project Keep the default selection in the Time zone field Choose Meters in the All Distances in field Click on the Miscellaneous tab and check that the Minimum Vector Time Span field is set to 5 minutes otherwise correct it 61 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Click on the OK button twice As a result a new project named Tuto 3 opens in the GNSS Studio main window and the following dialog box is displayed What would you like to do next Download Raw Data from Receiver Recescnsessessessscesssssasessnsensessersscsnsessasessnsensesesscesssenseasensnsssenssssssssssscsasessnsusssssascasessasoasesssseasees Download Positions from Receiver or RTK Controller Import Positions from Files on Disk x Do Not Import Anything Now LI Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data This step includes defining control points and network adjustment
173. is Point Control Point gt N Name cP1040 oO Description Point B Layer Zones 3 o fa Control Survey ee Long D Long Fixed Iv as 122 08 34 2695 W 0 000 22 08 34 2695 Ww 0 000 Lat ill Iv 37 22 43 8330 N 0 000 Iv 3 3 8330 N 0 000 Height Height Fredi Iv 25 870 0 000 25 870 0 000 159 Reference Working in a Map Document Click OK The new point now appears on the map Its representation on the map relies on the definition of the ayer this point belongs to see next two paragraphs You can quickly create as many points of the same type as needed by holding down the Shift key and clicking repeatedly on the map where you want these points to be created In this case GNSS Studio skips the dis play of the Points properties dialog box and automatically creates the points Lines and areas can be created using the same technique On the map toolbar Select lt Project_Name gt Lines in the combo box click B then start draw ing the line on the map by clicking on the start point then at the end of each new segment forming the line To end the line double click the last point In the dialog box that opens complete the fields defining the line on the Line tab and then click OK to close the dialog box The new line then appears on the map Its representation relies on the definition of the layer this line belongs to see next two paragraphs
174. is Hold down the mouse left button and drag in the direction that would bring the desired point on the visible part of the globe When you release the mouse button this will cause the globe to rotate around its axis by an angle proportional to the distance traveled by the mouse pointer while dragging 208 Mission Planning Utility World Map editor LI Zooming in Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the globe Right click on the mouse and choose Zoom in The mouse pointer now looks like this amp Position the mouse pointer on the globe where you would like to zoom in and then click on the left button This causes the region to be magni fied The center point of the magnified view is in fact the point where you have just clicked You can repeat this operation several times as long as the mouse pointer is a magnifying glass From the initial view showing all the globe up to 6 successive zoom in operations can be performed LI Zooming out Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the globe Right click on the mouse and choose Zoom out The mouse pointer now looks like this amp Position the mouse pointer on the globe where you would like to zoom out and then click on the left button This causes the region to be reduced in size The center point of the reduced view is in fact the point where you have just clicked az a 5 jul e va UoISSIN You can repeat this operation several time
175. is Held fixed by the user Involved in a large number of baselines Associated with a long observation Surprisingly this step applies to a dynamic log file In fact as long as a trajectory remains unprocessed in GNSS Studio it is assumed to be a point which means a point whose position is that of the trajectory s start point as explained in footnote a A baseline is defined as the straight line between the two points associated with a pair of simultaneous observation files 297 gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter 3 Baseline Processing Project gt Process All Baselines command To process a baseline GNSS Studio needs The point providing the reference position A file the reference point is associated with The surveyed site start point of survey A file the surveyed site is associated with An indication on the processing mode to use Stop amp Go if you are only interested in the processing of the static occupation times contained in the observation file or dynamic if you are only interested in the tra jectory regardless of the presence of static occupation times in the obser vation file To know the processing options If the Dynamic mode is selected the following processing steps are run in GNSS Studio 298 All objects in the Points and Vectors collections pertaining to the trajec tory being processed are
176. it delete antennas Each antenna definition includes a name a description and the locations of its center phases with respect to features easy to locate on the antenna itself Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Customize Opens the Customize dialog box containing three tabs The Toolbars tab lets you choose which default toolbars to display in the GNSS Studio window Other viewing options can be set on this tab The Command tab lets you move the available GNSS Studio command buttons to any toolbar The Tools tab is used to add remove new programs to the GNSS Studio Tools menu hence to the Commands tab in the Workspace pane programs are shown as large icons on this tab Options Opens the Options dialog box in which you can set a number of editing options concerning report documents gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Q Window Menu Cascade Arranges the open documents in cascade configuration Tile Horizontally Arranges the open documents in horizontal tile configura tion Tile Vertically Arranges the open documents in vertical tile configuration Close All Closes all the documents open in the View pane Open Documents List Lists all the documents open in the View pane Checking one of them makes it the active document LJ Help Menu User s Guide Opens the On Line help system file in Acrobat Reader Explain Not implemented About GNSS Studio Displays the software version licensee name and list o
177. ive it geographical dimen sions To do this you have to define at least two reference points whose coordinates are accurately known in the system used see procedure below It is therefore essential that the map provided in the JPG file be based on the same coordinate system as the vector layer imported earlier which is the case in this example 2 Sizing amp Importing the Raster Image k Refer to the numeric values contained in the two dialog boxes below to com plete the present step 3 m e pa m AN Right click on the map and select Add reference points Click exactly on the mark located on the left of the village name La Savaudi re and then enter the point coordinates in the dialog box that shows up nearby Enter the coordinates provided in the figure below and then click OK Carquefou Raster Layer OF x j k i y a A i E 309000000 2262000 000 Aee saa i nae 4 foo Y avalide 5 fie i i pa m Cancel 35 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to access the place named La Jalousie in the lower right corner of the image see figure below how the scroll bars should be positioned to get to this point There is a refer ence mark located on the freeway just on the left of this name As previ ously click exactly on this point and then refer to the figure below to
178. ke the following choices Default Project Settings a x Region Miscellaneous Feature Code List ar FRANCE NTF Lambert Il Spatial Reference System Time zone GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris Linear unit All distances in Meters Me Cancel Apply 13 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click on the OK button twice GNSS Studio then creates the Tuto 1 project and the following dialog is then displayed What would you like to do next Q Step 2 Importing Points into the Project Click on Import Positions from Files on Disk Inthe dialog box that appears make the following two choices Import Positions from Files on Disk g x TOS Coordinate File CA5 CARLSON Coordinate File CAD Thales In Thales 472 out Cancel 14 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click OK This causes the Open dialog box to appear Insert the GNSS Studio CD ROM in the computer s CD drive Using the Look in combo box select the following folder on the GNSS Studio CD ROM Samples RealTime Select the txt file stored in this folder and click Open GNSS Studio starts importing the file into the project database A message is displayed while data import takes place At the end of the import phase the imported points appear in the View pane see explanations in the next step 3 m e pa m
179. keep it unchanged default value 1 See also Network Adjustment on page 308 Precise Orbit Files Use this field to specify the path and folder where GNSS Studio can find the precise orbit files in SP3 or EF 18 format Use this field to specify the type of precise orbit data to be used by default in the project There are three possible choices Broadcast default choice orbit data from satellites Precise SP3 Precise EF18 Quality Control Use this field to enter the desired horizontal accuracy for all vec tors processed and adjusted in the project Computed uncertain ties of adjusted data will be compared to this threshold value Any data not meeting this accuracy will be flagged in the QA attribute as Failed Use this field to enter the desired vertical accuracy for all vectors processed and adjusted in the project Computed uncertainties of Vertical adjusted data will be compared to this threshold value Any data not meeting this accuracy will be flagged in the QA attribute as Failed Maximum Use this field to enter the maximum permitted deviation between acceptable control the known coordinates of any control target or reference point error and the surveyed coordinates for this point 98 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Processing scenario control Rebuild process scenario automatically on any change parameter If you make changes to the project that impact the processing scenario det
180. know which values to enter Then enter the name of the map in the Map name field For example type Carquefou Carquefou Raster Layer 36 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click OK to close the dialog box As a result the JPG file now appears as a new collection in the database of the Background map project see Col lections tab in the Workspace pane You can also see the raster image on the View pane in the Map View map document after zooming in on the area covered by the raster image CT iT zone ne Il s Ei 350000 0 a 300000 00 sb be ee IF it Hil il 3 m e pa m AN 37 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Q Step 14 Combining Survey Results amp Vector Raster Lay ers on a Map Change the active project by selecting Project gt Set Active Project and then by checking Tuto_1 1 Creating a New Map Document Inthe Workspace pane on the Commands tab click on the Project topic bar and then on the Create New Document icon The New dialog box opens Select Map in the left hand list Enter a name for the new map document ResultMap Documents Projects Workspaces Add to project Tuto_1 File name R esultM apt Folder 38 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click OK to create the map document which then opens in the View pane The document is also listed in the Workspace pane in the Docu men
181. l 800372 September 301998 19 09 50 0 1 925 Vertical 800372 September 30 1998 18 02 50 0 1 578 Slant 800372 e e OK v Cancel Downloded from Receiver Imported from Files on Disk Downloaded from Internet 7 O oO O O Adds more files to the raw data table The upper table allows you to read the properties of the files selected for import Some of their properties may be edited individually name of associated site or point dynamic static file antenna height height type antenna type Three buttons in the upper right corner are associated with this table H Displays a time diagram showing the static occupations detected in the files listed in the upper table Static occupations are represented by gray rectangles and dynamic occupations by gray lines If you click on this button after selecting one of the files in the table then the static occupation corresponding to this file will appear in dark blue See also Editing an Observation File on page 135 109 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project H Displays a time diagram showing the data for each satellite as read from the selected file This button is only active 1f a file is high lighted in the table See also Editing an Observation File on page 135 x Allows you to remove the selected file from the table because you do not want to import it anymor
182. lable files list This field lists the file name of the B File corresponding to the selected Ashtech data B File file in the available files list This field lists the file name of the E File corresponding to the selected Ashtech data E File file in the available files list This field lists the file name of the S File corresponding to the selected Ashtech data file in the available files list BEGIN Click this button to open the Conversion Status dialog box and begin converting the Button Ashtech files to RINEX file format S File Q lt Q Obs This field lists the suggested file name for the converted observation data file Nav This field lists the suggested file name for the converted navigation data file Met This field lists the suggested file name for the converted GLONASS navigation data file This field lists the suggested file name for the converted meteorological data file Click this button to open the Set input directory dialog box See next entry in this Input dir table Set input directory This combo box lets you select the directory where the converted files will be stored Click this button to set the output directory the same as the input directory Click this button to open the Set output directory dialog box See next entry in this Output dir table eee This combo box displays the directory path where converted RINEX files are stored Select the overwrite options Prompt for overwrite Alw
183. layed in the active map document 141 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Vector tab contains the following information 142 Vectors J886 gt MISS x Point Vector From To Miss H Start time 30 09 98 18 17 50 E Span oass50 0 C t S Solution Fia t S M Enabled M Adjusted Residuals Process Results Adjustment Results Residual 95 err 95 err Dx seo anes 0x aes oT DX Tone bv aieme 00s bY arate onr2 DY 0005 oz sesaase oo Dz aa oe DZ T005 Length o 10500 Length 10504 Length u0 Cancel From The point taken as reference and from which the vector originates shown in dark blue in the above diagram If the list contains several points this means that other vector solutions exist that also end to the point mentioned below in the To field These vectors are shown in gray in the above diagram To The point where the vector ends Start time The beginning of the static occupation that has allowed GNSS Studio to calculate the vector If two or more start times are listed in this combo box several solutions then exist for the vector joining the two points selected above repeat vectors The displayed vector solution cor responds to the selected occupation time Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Span Duration of the selected static occupation non editable Solution Solution status software se
184. le is defined by the following parameters Name of the attribute chosen to identify the objects in the collection For example you can use the point name or one of its feature codes to iden tify all points on the map Text color name Background color behind name Line or fill style for collections of lines or areas Icon assigned to objects defined as a file stored in GNSS Studio Sym bols The user can create new icons if required and store them with the existing ones see also Adding a New Layer to a Map Document on page 163 Icon size Name position with respect to the icon An example of Style dialog box is shown below To view this box right click anywhere in the open map document select Legend select the Logged points layer in the list and then click amp 7 O oO O O O Logged Points Properties x Data Style V Text Name A f M Back i Cee M Symbol ico 7 Nomal Selected 93 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 94 In a collection you can decide on which objects you would like to show on the map thus making the other ones invisible This choice is made by setting a display filter From the previous screen click on the Data tab to access the filter definition parameters Logged Points Properties x Data Style Collection Ntw1 Points a ogged Points Attribute 123 Type In this filter example only points f
185. least the following three options 7 O oO O O Spatial Reference System EF was 84 l if Local L Series Dd News Selecting lt Local gt will allow you to work in the unknown local system Selecting lt WGS 84 gt will directly select WGS 84 as the project s coordi nate system You can edit the definition of the WGS 84 by clicking the E button next to the field If you change and enable any of the parameters defining the WGS 84 GNSS Studio will create a new system named WGS 84 1 by default 81 3 Reference Coordinate Systems Selecting lt New gt will display the following dialog box Welcome to Coordinate System Wizard This wizard will help you ys SELECT S PREDEFINED system a C Define a NEW PROJECTED system EASTING NORTHING HEIGHT E T C Define a NEW GEOGRAPHIC system LATITUDE LONGITUDE HEIGHT Ifyou check SELECT a PRE DEFINED system and you click the Next button GNSS Studio will display the list of pre defined systems more than 500 available In this case you just have to select a system in the right hand list see example below and click the Finish button Coordinate System Wizard Select im x Predefined csl HS AUSTRALIA LE AUSTRIA MGI Austria Central Zone EV AUSTRIA fT AUSTRIA MGI Austria East Zone MGI Tra Y MGI T FAUSTRIA MGI Austria West Zone MGI Tra H 7 BELGIUM FAUSTRIA MGI
186. lect Help gt About GNSS Studio The dialog box that appears lists all the possible options Each option is followed by its current status Yes means the option is enabled Yes xx day s means the option is enabled for xx days only No means the option is disabled In the example below all the options are available for use Available software options Real time Job Transfer es L1 Post Processing es L1 L2 Post Processing Yes 5 1 Introduction to GNSS Studio Installation Q Unlocking a Software Option After a certain time using your GNSS Studio you may need to unlock a soft ware option that you did not initially purchase After ordering this new op tion do the following On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Help gt About GNSS Studio Inthe About GNSS Studio dialog box that opens click on the button on the right A new dialog box opens which should look like the one below if a dongle is connected to the PC s USB or parallel port Unlock Software Option Using software protection method licence file Using hardware protection method dongle four personal code is 1264 Please contact THALES Navigation to register and get the password for the software option you want to unlock www halesnavigation com Then type this password in the edit box below and press OF when ready aa Cancel To get the password needed to run the desired option and also to be reg is
187. ler than the allowable error computed from the accuracy specification the repeat vectors pass the QA test This is normally a good indication that no blunder exists in the vectors and that the vectors are of sufficient quality to produce a network that will meet the desired accuracy e Ifthe difference between the repeat observations of a vector is larger than the allowable error computed from the accuracy specification the repeat vectors are flagged as having failed the QA analysis test Any repeat observations that fail the test should be examined closely to determine if a blunder exists 325 1 2 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Q Control Tie Analysis For many surveys there is a requirement to tie the survey into a local region al or national control network Many times the exact control points to be used for this purpose will be specified To meet this requirement these con trol points will need to be held fixed in the final constrained adjustment therefore computing positions for the new survey points in relation to the specified control points In addition to the requirement for tying into a control network most surveys will also have an accuracy specification that must be met The control tie analysis feature automatically computes the accuracy for each control point This is accomplished by holding one of the control points fixed in the minimally constrained adjustment and comparing the adjusted position to the k
188. lity Downloading Data From a Receiver Select Connect from the File menu If you are downloading data from an SD card inserted in the SD card reader of your computer select PC Drive and skip step 4 If you are downloading data from a receiver select Receiver and then select Connect via USB to connect to the receiver via USB or Connect via Cable to connect to the receiver via an RS232 line a If you choose Connect via USB the Connect via USB dialog box opens If only the Z Max is connected to the PC via USB then this dialog box looks like this and only the option below Z Max USB devicel is prompted Connect via USB i xj Select USB device Cancel Help Download Utility Downloading Data From a Receiver b If you choose Connect via Cable the Connect via Cable dialog box opens Select the serial port corresponding to your case of use and then choose the right communication parameters on the Settings tab gt be po Connect via Cable Ea Select Port Settings ETAN Connect via Cable x Select Port Settings Baud Rate Word Length Handshaking 57600 a 7 I Use DTR DSR Parity Stop Bits M Use RTS CTS Click OK Download makes the connection to display the content of the SD card Before that and the first time you connect to an SD card Download spends some time mounting the SD card file system as indi cated in the lower part of the left pane this operation
189. lity Sending a Command to the GPS receiver Each data line ends with lt CR gt lt LF gt characters and or when it reaches the maximum length 80 characters Clear View Clicking this button deletes any data displayed in the Display pane window Print View Clicking this button opens a Print dialog box that allows you to print any data displayed in the Display pane window Pause Freezes the Display pane window and changes the label of the but ton to Resume Pressing the Pause button does not suspend the data flow on the receiver port or the recording in progress Pressing this button again now changed to a Resume button will re acti vate the Display pane window Sending a Command to the GPS receiver After communication is established between the computer and the GPS re ceiver the Command pane can be used to send commands to the receiver la bel of selected command group recalled in the command pane see example below Command 5000 ka Send Advanced Command box Label box To send a command do the following Type the command in the Command combo box or select it from the Com mand or Label combo box Click the Send button The list of commands prompted in the Label combo box can be changed using the Advanced button 224 WinComm Utility Sending a Command to the GPS receiver Q Commands editor dialog box This dialog box appearing after you click the Advanced button allows you
190. load Raw Data from Internet Runs the Internet Download module allowing you to download compact RINEX raw data or precise orbit files from a provider via the Internet into the active project Download Positions from External Device Allows you to download RTK results from the attached data collector into the active project Data col lectors may be those used in conjunction with Thales Navigation Z Max 6500 or 6000 receivers Import Positions from Files on Disk Allows you to import different types of files from your disk into the active project Files may contain points in NMEA CR5 or CRD format vectors in Ashtech O format or fea tures in AutoCAD DXF format Change Into Used to change the type of the point currently selected in the active map document Define Control Points Opens a secondary window allowing you to define new control points in your project Blunder Detection Tests all observation files in the project for blunders unexpected out of range antenna height or observation files with simul taneous static occupation times less than a given threshold Any detected blunder is reported in the output pane and the test is declared as failed Rebuild Process Scenario Re examines all the observation files available in the project to deduce all the possible baselines that can be processed making assumptions on which points seem to be control points You need to confirm that you wish to rebuild the scenario bef
191. lows you to save the list of feature codes currently shown in the Feature Code tab as a fcl file Use this button when you wish to use this list of feature codes later and you do not want to waste your time typ ing these entries again In addition you can select a feature code by clicking the corresponding code in the leftmost column After a right click on this code you can delete this feature code or display its properties 100 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Adding a new feature code As explained on the previous page on the Feature Code tab click the New button This opens the New Feature Code dialog box The following param eters need to be defined in this dialog box An abbreviated code displayed on the display screen of the surveying equip ment to help the operator classify the points she he has to survey in the current job 32 characters max Name of the family of elements to which the code presented above refers Fulltext A description clearly explaining what s behind the code presented above Polyline On YES means that all the points surveyed successively will by default be assigned the above code and so will form a polyline with point Ids Polyline On incremented automatically Polyline On NO means the opposite namely each new surveyed point should be defined manually as to which code should be assigned to it Relevant only if Polyline OnN YES Polyline is 3D YES means that all the surveyed poin
192. ly be an average of all the straight GPS solutions determined from the data blocks present in this file gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN 2 GNSS Studio Internal Processing Steps Tied to Raw Data Import Project gt Import Raw Data from Files on Disk command When importing a raw data file observation file into the active project after the user has provided a File name a Point name and has specified that the file results from static logging the following takes place in GNSS Studio An approximate position let s call it P0 is determined in straight GPS mode A new object is added to the project database in the Files collection This object provides a full description of the imported file and also includes the name of the associated point name provided by the user at the begin ning of the import operation the approximate PO position computed in the previous step A file object is said to be static if it proceeds from static data logging Finally a new object is created in the Points collection and PO is assigned to this point If however a point already exists in the database with the name specified at the beginning of the import operation no new object will be created in the Points collection and in this case PO will not be assigned to this point 5 Fora static log file computing this coarse solution will allow GNSS Studio to locate the surveyed point on any map document created in the
193. ly these objects in a table doc ument that you are interested in viewing The result of this operation is that the table document will contain fewer objects fewer rows On the menu bar select Table gt Data This opens the Table Properties dialog box In the list of attributes select the attribute for which you want to set a fil ter For example select Surv _Horz Conf Click Ei In the dialog box that opens make the following choices Attribute and filter og x Attribute x i Sure Horz Conf an a Plase l lis greater than foma O fa f And Or cae Click OK twice The table document now only consists of a number of rows showing the objects meeting the filter criterion This criterion 1s recalled in the corresponding cell just under the column header Inciden tally if you click on this cell GNSS Studio will re open the above dialog box 173 3 Reference Working in a Table Document Q Sorting Objects in a Table Document You can sort the objects present in table documents according to your needs This is explained below 174 Open the desired table document in the View pane and then click on the desired tab On the menu bar select Table gt Sort This opens the Table Properties dialog box showing the Sort tab In the upper left field click on the down arrow and then select the attribute on which object sorting will be based Note that the choice of attributes in the
194. main window on the screen k The first time you download data GNSS Studio will first ask you to install the USB driver and for this purpose will ask you to specify the folder where the USB driver can be found To install the USB driver insert the GNSS Studio installation CD in your CD drive and then select the USB Driver folder on the CD GNSS Studio will then automatically install the USB driver using the files found in this folder and then will proceed to the download operation 106 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project On the menu bar in Download select File gt Connect gt Receiver gt Connect via USB then choose Thales Navigation USB device in the Connect via USB dialog box that opens and finally click OK After communication is estab lished with the Z Max Download shows the files in the PC current direc tory on the right pane and the files present in the SD card on the left pane On PC side select the directory where you want to download the files default directory project directory On the left pane select the file s to be downloaded and drag them to the PC pane Download copies the file to the PC A progress dialog box indi cates the status of the download k The Project gt Download Raw Data from Receiver command should not be confused with the Project gt Import Raw Data from Files on Disk command This latter command can only import pre converted data files ready for pro cessing whereas the fo
195. manually from this dialog box cf Connect button 19 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey A number of files need to be transferred for any job you wish to upload to the data collector the CRD file the SYS file the INF file the FCL file and the SCB file When transfer is automatic GNSS Studio knows which files to transfer When transfer is manual you must select these files in the left hand pane before uploading For this tutorial you would have to select the following files in the left hand pane before clicking the Transfer button 2nd button from the left in the lower part of the dialog box SuryCom lel ES Local PC Total Files 4 Bytes 3267 Bytes Free 3020M Local Path D My projects Tuto_1 Job Size Modified 04 29 03 08 51 Remote Total Files 63 Bytes 192747 Bytes Free 14755K Remote Path Program files Suryce Data Up One Level 02 24 03 20 TUTO_102 FCL O 04 28 03 12 TUTO_102 INF 1335 04 28 0312 TUTO_102 SYS 619 04 28 03 12 TUTO_102 CRD 1094 04 28 03 12 EGM96 GSF 13474 04 16 03 16 eS Up One Level TUTO_100 CRD 1094 04 29 03 08 51 ttttt 04 09 03 18 hotel07 txt O 04 09 03 18 tyu 04 09 03 18 CSGIS 04 09 03 18 11 int 1736 04 07 03 18 mF af File Tagged LOCAL Files 3 Bytes 3036 Status Connected to remote machine N Gl a a e o Connect Transfer SetPath Makedir Delete Rename Options Geoid F2F conv Exit
196. me the whole file import process Files may have different sources your disk Internet or your field equipment When you are ready to import files click on the OK button A drop down menu 1s displayed in which you can choose to simply import the files or automatically run one or more operations in succession after file import Cancel To Import To Import and Process Single Sites To Import and Process Baselines To Import Process and Adjust Choose the option that suits you best e Use To Import if you just want to import the files You may want to do this because you prefer to break down the whole processing into dis tinct basic steps Why Because you want full control over each of these steps You will then analyze the processing scenario prompted by GNSS Studio and make changes to it if required You will then run the baseline processing as such followed by a network adjust ment step if appropriate 7 O oO O e Ifyou use the To Import and Process Single Sites option GNSS Studio will import the files and then will determine the locations of all the points calculated from the imported files Use this option to preview all the points of a dynamic or stop amp go survey prior to processing the baselines e Use To Import and process Baselines to import and then process the baselines according to the processing scenario found by GNSS Stu dio You will skip the checking of the processing scena
197. mine if there are subsets of the data set that are not connected by observa tions Q Variance of Unit Weight Standard Error of Unit Weight The Variance of Unit Weight and the Standard Error of Unit Weight the square root of the Variance of Unit Weight monitor the relationship between the uncertainties assigned with the observations and the magnitude of the change required to each observation residuals in the adjustment 315 1 2 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Changes to the observations should be small and should not be significantly greater than the uncertainties associated with the observations The Variance of Unit Weight and Standard Error of Unit Weight gauge the magnitude of the observation changes residuals compared to the observa tion uncertainties for the entire network Analysis of the magnitude of the computed Variance of Unit Weight and Standard Error of Unit Weight reveals one of the following three conditions regarding the quality of the adjustment 1 A computed value close to 1 is an indication that the changes to the observations residuals are within expected levels 1 e within the uncer tainties associated with the observations Since this is the desired out come a value close to 1 is normally an indication of a good adjustment 2 A computed value significantly smaller than 1 indicates an imbalance between the observation residuals changes and observation uncertain ties Specifically the obs
198. ms gt Thales Naviga tion gt GNSS Studio The main window opens from which you can start working with GNSS Studio See window description below LY Description of the Main Window GNSS Studio _ O x File Edit view Project Tools Window Help f Sua aeoe BRS 7 O oO z e O Create New Project Workspace pane A 3 tab pane The Collections tab shows the ar chitecture of the project database The Documents tab shows the list of documents attached to the project View pane Views documents pertaining to the project s present in the workspace Output pane reports all internal operations in real time Error messages if any will appear in red warning messages in orange IB RQQ amp 6 as J X B No colection 7 Now Only the Commands tab is visible in the Workspace pane until you open a work space in GNSS Studio 75 3 Reference Introduction O Quitting GNSS Studio On the GNSS Studio menu bar select File gt Exit This closes the applica tion If projects are still open in the main window when running the Exit command then all these projects will be first saved and closed before GNSS Studio itself is closed LI Notions of Workspace amp Database Every new project that you create relies on the following architecture Project 1 Collections Collection 1 Project database Attributes text numeric geometric Attributes _ Object n text
199. n It is possible for a good observation to have large residuals This obviously complicates the use of residuals to find blunders but this obstacle can be overcome with the understanding of why a good observation will produce large residuals A least squares adjustment tends to distribute the effects of blunders throughout the entire network In other words a blunder in one observation usually affects the residuals in other observations 320 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools The effect is greater on observations closer to the blunder and diminishes further out The trick is to find the observation with the blunder among all the observations containing large residuals due to the blunder In most cases the observation with the largest residuals is the observation con taining the blunder Remove this observation and rerun the adjustment If all residuals look good at this point the blunder was identified and removed If large residuals still exist again remove the observation with the largest residuals and rerun the adjustment Do this until the adjust ment looks good It is possible that some of the observations removed do not contain blunders At this time each observation removed should be added back to the adjustment one at a time rerunning the adjustment each time an observation is added If the adjustment looks good that par ticular observation did not contain a blunder If the adjustment looks bad after adding back one of the obser
200. n on the ResultMap map document 3 m e pa m AN 3000 00 3 Making the Raster Image Visible on the Map Document Inthe Workspace pane click on the Collections tab In this tab click on the Carquefou collection Drag amp drop this collection on the map document As a result the collec tion is now displayed on the map A zoom to fit operation is automati cally run to make visible all objects present in the map document 4 300000 00 a l 4 250000 00 300000 00 350000 00 41 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey 42 Note that unlike all other collections no layer properties are accessible for this type of collection which means you cannot edit a style or a filter for a raster layer Making the Points Collection Visible on the Map Document In the Workspace pane click on the Collections tab In this tab click on the Points collection Drag amp drop this collection on the map document As previously with the vector layer this causes the Layer Wizard Data dialog box to appear asking you to create a filter to be applied to this collection Click iQ in the right upper part of this dialog box and make the follow ing choices in the dialog box that opens Attribute and filter x Attribute ate Description Filter equals os sion Click OK to close this window This takes you back to the Layer Wizard Data dialog box in which the filter you have just de
201. n of any interesting point located in the working area 5th step Download the survey results into the initial project using the Project gt Download Positions from External Device command The results will ap pear immediately on the project map according to the current settings of style and display filter for the concerned collection types In addition all measure ments made in the field will result in new vectors added to the Vectors col lection in the project database 294 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter 6th step Analyze the results and create a report using the Project gt Land Survey Report GNSS Studio uses the VB Script macro saved in Studio Macro This macro drives GNSS Studio to format the data read from the database gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN LI Stop amp Go Survey Tutorial 2 1 Field Survey Goals in Stop amp Go or Dynamic Mode Post processing surveys are performed in the field using Thales Navigation receivers for collecting GPS raw data on the site to be surveyed Potentially from each data block in a log file a straight GPS position can be determined for the receiver location when the data block was logged The longer the logging time the larger the number of data blocks available for the post processing phase In order to reach centimeter level accuracies for the surveyed site raw data files must be logged simultaneously in two distinct receivers One mus
202. n point or load it if it has already been defined and saved Click on the Local Obstructions button 211 Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor Q Changing the curtain view Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the curtain editor Right click on the mouse and select the linear or polar view Q Drawing a curtain 212 Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the chart and click with the right mouse button In the shortcut menu that pops up select the Draw command The mouse pointer then changes to Position the mouse pointer on the desired location referring to the Az and Ev indications and click with the mouse to begin drawing the cur tain Move the mouse pointer to reach the next point Note the curve that results from the pointer displacement a straight line on the Linear view an arc on the Polar view Once you have reached the next point click with the mouse again etc If you need to go through the 0 360 or 360 0 limits while you draw an obstruction zone move the pointer outside the chart This causes the hor izontal scale to move accordingly so long as you keep the pointer outside the chart To complete the curtain definition double click on the last point As a result the curtain appears in blue as a closed shape even if the last point is not superimposed on the first one On the Linear view the curtain is always a polygon on the Polar view it is a close shape composed of sev eral arcs A
203. n the project and mentioning this object 7 O oO O To access the Properties dialog box from a map document Select a point on the map Right click on this point and select Properties in the pop up menu In the dialog box that opens make the changes required 133 134 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project To access the Properties dialog box from a table document Select the row in the table providing the attributes of the point Right click anywhere on this row and select Properties in the pop up menu Inthe dialog box that opens make the changes required Below is an example of point properties Points Base x Point E ContolPoint E ContolPoint Paint Name Bae tit Description Base Base Station Layer TN Base Stations Base Stations E Mm 0 01 m Control Survey Errors Es wGS 84 Total Error v Long B Long Estimated Vv m 37 13 24 52170 E 19 600 l 37 13 24 52160 E 19 600 0 001 Lat Estimated Vv 5e 01 39 96070 N 19 600 E l 56 01 39 96040 N 19 600 0 008 Height Height Estimated Vv 271 900 19 600 E 271 905 13 600 0 005 Cancel Apply Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Q Editing an Observation File The properties of an observation file are presented on a two tab window The File tab contains the following information Files Bkinma96 026 x File Stops al Sig
204. nal to Noise Ratio L1 L2 me emme bO bO bo tO b Obeh SAD aman Lam am an L am Lan Lan L an an File Name Bkinma96 026 Size b 342833 Start Time 26 01 96 07 12 35 Time Span 00 33 00 zo Meas Type E L2 GPS Sampling E ar ag fa r Default Site Default Antenna Site ID a Antenna Height m 0 000 T Height Type P C As Point Static File POOR Vertical E T As Trajectory Dynamic File Antenna Type x Rl Graphic area on top showing Signal To Noise Ratio Satellite Elevation or Carrier Phase versus Time This information can be plotted for each satellite or for all satellites in view during the observation by clicking the corresponding tab in the lower part of the graphic area Clicking E in the right upper corner will maximize the graphic area on the PC screen for maximum reading comfort You can zoom in on a par ticular region by dragging a rectangle around this region Press the Esc key to zoom out 135 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Flags will be shown on the curves wherever something happened during data collection loss of lock X possible loss of lock carrier phase questionable To read the meaning of a flag simply click on this flag Markers can also be shown on the curves They represent the time of basic data acquisition from a given satellite Selecting the desired viewing options for the graphic area 1s achieved by ri
205. nath gt x_Miscl 2Y _Miscl 22 Miscl k Length_Miscl 123 X_Miscl_PPM 123 _Miscl_PPM 123 2 Miscl_PPM 123 Length_Miscl 123 X_Miscl_Ratio 123 Y_Miscl_Ratio 123 2 Miscl_Ratio 123 Length_Miscl Loop number Total loop length Dx component misclosure DY component misclosure DZ component misclosure Total misclosure DX component misclosure in PPM DY component misclosure in PPM DZ component misclosure in PPM Total misclosure in PPM DX component misclosure ratio DY component misclosure ratio DZ component misclosure ratio Total misclosure ratio Appendices Created Files amp Directories Created Files amp Directories Q Creating a New Project in a New Workspace gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN The project and the workspace will then have the same name A new folder named lt project_name gt as well as two files are created in the MyProjects folder A number of files are created in the new folder These files are in fact the default documents listed on the Documents tab of the Workspace pane Below is a project structure example as seen from Win dows Explorer Fl _ My Projects Ay TUOD aane a Design View map fl Tuto _5 rtf 7 B Survey view map _ cr Tuto_5 wsp j EJ Time view Evi ba Tuto _5 L5P m Workbook tbl Where map map documents tvw time view documents LSP Land survey project database tbl table documents gt rtf RTF file c
206. nce Working in a Land Survey Project To create a mask for a process click in the Mask column The Mask dialog box opens in which you can define a mask graphi cally working from the commands available in the pop up menu For example in the figure below SV No 17 has been masked from 17 20 to 17 30 To place a mask right click on the diagram select the Mask command in the menu and drag a rectangle over the desired satellite and period of time Mask of Xx 7 17 a m LA 15 a gt Mask bis Unmask a j Zoom In i 8 Zoom Out T 6 Panoramic 3 Mask All Unmask All T 17 10 17 20 17 30 17 40 17 50 18 00 04 20 76 10 33 21 UTC Cancel When you agree with the displayed scenario click on the OK button A drop down menu is then displayed so you can choose which option suits you best Cancel e To Save and Process selected Baseline To Saye To Save Process selected baselines and Adjust 115 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project e The To Save option will only save the processing scenario and close the dialog box e The To Save and Process selected Baselines option will save the processing scenario and then will process the selected baselines in this scenario Then the results for these baselines will appear in the different open documents e The To Save Process Baselines and Adjust option will in addition adjust the network compared to the second option LI
207. nce points On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Coordinate Calibration The Compute Local System dialog box appears listing all the reference points you have just selected see example below 125 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project 126 Compute Local System Using logged reference points Horizontal Residual Vertical Residual QB A954 20 B A101 20 G R37 2D A20 2D Add Edit nene Advanced Compute Results In this dialog box the Advanced button allows you to fix a number of parameters in the horizontal grid if some of them are already known before running the Coordinate Calibration command If you do not know anything about the horizontal grid then do not fix any of its parameters The Edit and Remove buttons allow you to edit or remove a reference point you select in the list By giving you access to a dialog box listing all the reference points present in the project the Add button allows you to involve more reference points in the calibration if needed The larger the number of reference points involved the better the coordinate calibration max 20 reference points Once the list of reference points is okay click the Compute button to let GNSS Studio determine the local system The dialog box is then refreshed to show the Horizontal and Vertical Residuals see example below Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Compute Local System Usi
208. nd enter a name for this file Click the Save button to export the data to that file 7 O oO O Q Creating a Survey Report GNSS Studio allows you create almost instantly a survey report for your cli ents or for your archives This report being part of the project it is listed in the Documents tab of the Workspace pane as are all the other types of created documents after you have saved it as an RTF file The process of creating a survey report is based on the use of a VB Script macro stored in the Studio Macro folder To create a report press the F9 key or click on the Land Survey Report icon in the Export topic bar or select Project gt Land Survey Report then select Land Sur vey Overview and click OK 149 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project This opens the following dialog in which you can choose which topics you wish to include in the report Select the needed paragraphs mm xj C Point Count Control Points Reference Points Target Points Logged Points Lines Processed vectors Repeat vectors Adjusted vectors Cancel Check the topics you want to include clear those you want to exclude Click OK to let GNSS Studio create the report according to your request 150 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Creating Custom Formats With GNSS Studio you can easily create a data import or export format suit ed to your needs All the creation process
209. nd the location of the point currently selected on the Point tab The total length of the line measured in two dimensions projected onto horizontal plane and in three dimensions 1 e taking into account the individual height of each of the points making up the line 146 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Point tab shows the properties of each of the points making up the line Use the vertical scroll bar to browse through the list of points The Offset tab shows the pivot points when the point selected on the Point tab was surveyed through an offset method 6000 amp 6500 only The Vector tab shows the properties of all the vectors from which the survey of the line proceeds Use the vertical scroll bar to browse through the vectors list Each vector connects the reference point to each of the points forming the line Q Editing an Area Areas 1 FET Pont Ofset Vet JE Name fi Description Layer Comment 7 O oO O O 2D Length a1 921 3D Length a1 922 Area 208 781 The properties of an area are presented on a four tab dialog box see above To open this box double click an area displayed in the active map document 147 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The Line tab contains the following information Name and description of the area name of the layer the area belongs to comment A graphic view of the area showi
210. nection ENT gt ENJieca central meridian 0 O0 O0 00000 Easting of origin E0 0000m scale_factor 1 000000000000 Ooo Northing of origin NO oom Sti i CS false_easting 0 000 m Scale factor K 1 000000000000 false_northing oom Easting offset DE oom Northing offset DN 0 000 m Rotation angle Beta o 00 00 00000 E local EQ 1 K E DE cos Beta N DN sin Beta N local NO 1 K E DE sin Beta N DN cos Betal lt Back Cancel Select the desired type of projection from the list attached to the Projection Class field and then complete the fields underneath Ifthe new system includes a horizontal correction check the box top right This action unveils a number of fields in the right hand part of the dialog box that you must complete to define the horizontal correction When you have finished defining the projection click the Next button to display the next dialog box see next page 86 Reference Coordinate Systems 3 Defining the system System Name Ee Height Up v M With vertical conection H gt H local UnitName Metes o y Height offset DH 0000m Meters per unit fo Gradient on latitude Gi 0000m tst S Vertical Datum O Elipsid sts Gradient on longitude Gg 0 000 md sts Vertical Unit Name Metes O Latitude of origine LO a Metres per unit cs Longitude of origine GO fo ooon o000 E IV Se
211. net Download window looks like this ai Internet Download a a xX THALES NAVIGATION Provider lias high rate Raw Data E Station Erst Load Available Base Station List Time one GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris ka Start Date igo x Start Time 8 03 40 AM Duration js End Date 1 20 2004 End Time 2301 22 FM Target Path CAMy Projects Tuto fo E Provider Infos http figscb jpl nasa gow Close 286 Internet Download Using Internet Download Using Internet Download The Internet Download window is organized and should be used as follows Provider This field contains the Provider s web address Internet Down load provides a pre defined list of about 10 providers When you select a provider the corresponding web address is displayed in the lower part of the window in underlined blue characters after the Provider Infos text string Clicking on this address would launch your Internet explorer to connect to this website Station This field is displayed only if you have selected a raw data pro vider in the the Provider field You then have to choose the station for which you want raw data The Load Available Base Station List button opposite allows you to ask the provider to send an up to date list of all the stations for which raw data files are collected Time Zone Select the option that fits your working area Start Date Start Time Durati
212. new name for the tab For example overwrite sheet 1 with Pts Table Properties x Data sort Collection Tuto_2 Points E Alias Pt Attribute Filter 170 Reference Working in a Table Document Click iii The new dialog box that opens allows you to choose the attributes you wish to see in the table document The default list shown in this table provides all the attributes that are not currently present in the table document You could also list all the possible attributes by check ing the Show all attributes radio button To add a new attribute to the table document as a new column in the Pts tab first select it in the list You can select several attributes at a time by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on the attributes Once all the desired attributes are highlighted click Add The Data tab is now displayed listing all the selected attributes Table Properties ij x Data Sort Collection Tuto_2 Points E As Tab Pts 7 O oO z O O Attribute Filter v Name Abe Comment 123 Constraints ak Ctrl _Northing ok Cancel Apply If you want to add more attributes to the Pts tab resume the previous two steps Note that you can change the order in which the attributes are listed on the Data tab To change the position of an attribute in the list e Select it e Click ka or until the attribute is at the desired position
213. ng its geometry and the location of the point currently selected on the Point tab The perimeter of the area in the selected unit measured on the horizontal plane 2D and in three dimensions 3D area in the selected unit pro jected onto horizontal plane 2D The Point tab shows the properties of each point making up the area Use the vertical scroll bar to browse through the list of points The Offset tab shows the pivot points when the point selected on the Point tab was surveyed through an offset method 6000 amp 6500 only The Vector tab shows the properties of all the vectors from which the survey of the area proceeds Use the vertical scroll bar to browse through the vectors list Each vector connects the reference point to each of the points forming the area ki Use the Project gt Group Points function to create an area from existing points 148 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LJ Exporting Data to a File Select the data you want to export You can make this selection on a map document or in a table document showing this data On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Export Positions to File on Disk The table below summarizes all export formats supported by GNSS Studio versus the type of exported data Export Format Points Vectors Features WERTH A a Sr ee EE a a ee Cmno e o o wrea e r eo o a mow o o Browse on your disk to select the folder where to store the export file a
214. ng logged reference points Horizontal Residual Vertical Residual Rar 20 R101 20 R201 20 RSS4 20 Add Edit nemen Advanced Compute Results Cancel By clicking the Results button you will be able to read the characteris tics of the local system Datum Projection System resulting from the calibration process Note that in this case all the fields are non editable fields 7 O oO O Q Computing Datum Shifts This function should be used exactly in the same way as the Performing Co ordinate Calibration on page 125 The only difference is that the present function only determines the set of parameters defining the datum and so as sumes that the projection used 1s correct 127 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Point Types Fundamentally GNSS Studio handles 5 point types 128 Logged point Point surveyed in the field in real time or post processing mode Intermediate point Logged point of lesser interest e g a point in a tra jectory Control point Surveyed point whose accurate position is already known This known position can be set as a fixed input to the processing or sim ply used as comparison material to assess the quality of the survey ai Control point not fixed x va Control point fixed vertically Pea Control point fixed horizontally wo Control point fixed vertically and horizontally Reference point A point materialized
215. ng those available Choose a model and then click OK A new window appears showing the main characteristics of the chosen geoid name date of creation file size comment geographical limits grid step and number of points 235 Geoids Utility Extracting a Region from a Geoid Model Example of geoid model open in Geoids EGM96 EGHMS6 geo mel Ea Name EGH96 Date 05714701 15 54 29 4058 KB Comment Global North coordinates 90 0 O 0000 N West coordinates 180 0 0 0000 South coordinates 90 O O 0000 S East coordinates 180 0 O0 0000 E Latitude step 15 00 Longitude step 15 00 Number of points 1038961 Extracting a Region from a Geoid Model 1 Select File gt Open and choose the geoid model from the displayed list Geoids will extract the data for your region from this model Then click OK The selected model appears in Geoids 2 Select File gt Extract As A new dialog box is displayed in which you can define the geographical area you are interested in Definition box for data extraction from a geoid model Extract region from EGHS6 geoid Mame EGMS671 Comment 30 O 0 0000 N South Eo o g lt oooo s 180 O 0 0000 East 180 O 0 0000 E r a T i ooroximate file size 4 04 Mo World Map Cancel 236 Geoids Utility Extracting a Region from a Geoid Model 3 Define the following parameters File name 8 characte
216. ngs dialog box under the Feature Code List tab See Project Set tings Feature Code List tab on page 99 for more information on this func tion LI Setting Feature Codes Use the Design View to see the changes you make when assigning feature codes to your survey features points etc The reason is that the legend of this default document is automatically completed every time you add a new feature code to the project For example if you add a new feature code named fence then GNSS Studio will create new layers in the Design View s leg end named fence Points fence Lines and fence Areas You can assign a feature code to one or more points by doing the following Select the desired points on the Design View map document or in any other open document 122 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Click on the CAD topic bar in the workspace pane and then on the Set Fea ture Codes icon A dialog then prompts you to assign one of the feature codes defined in the project to the selected points Set Feature Code a xj Set selected point feature code to yo L100 WIE Cancel Select the desired feature code click OK and then select e To Apply if you simply want to assign the feature code to the selected points This feature code will then appear as the Description parame ter in the properties of each of these points see Editing a Point on page 138 7 O oO O e
217. nicerienn eanas teasd ridna oineituisaa daddies 332 ED Loop Collection ass ccccsasscascesadiosias sscisanadeesiacdiciancicieaninens da dandaeiisuersoneudss astaajuadivaxeinannaneeen 332 Created Piles amp Directories escisiones a a r rE 333 Creating a New Project in a New Workspace cccccccsccecssscecesssccccsseecessseeeeesseeeeeens 333 GNSS Studio Menu Bat aa ors eretecdecstcedtnvacnccsadsies stork dededecassanebtecnddnioneceendctedsdavieciexcs 334 B ST IB ii E E ESAN A AE E rate de eae 334 Gk 6 11107 2 11 en E Cee Ae 335 FN E EA acne ces gua us ge carne A ccd eae veseon ala T E A E 336 A i E EEEN E N E EE E AT E E A A EA 336 Q Report Menu csicnvescecanantn ssenasnaisenssinuvedtedwesacanssadaeansaatuiseeessindusssiansshaanestuiasainaresaniaradoodees 337 T raph IN ss staan castrate ARAE A E A 337 A Map Mern EAE TE EA ERNA TN EAEAN 338 O Project Menu Land Survey Project rusian nee sousaceneneeeutanniaradeves 339 LY Project Menu Background Project cccccccccccssscecessseccesseeceesseecessseeceesseeeeessaeeessaees 343 DT GGT 8 Wi EO 344 TS Ty Meni secession se epestontsarcea ie E s 345 A Hep Menm eee eee meet ere ee Re eet ne een eee 345 vii GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Glossary Index viii Introduction to GNSS Studio Presentation Chapter 1 Introduction to GNSS Studio awa N Sy ou r m e Presentation LQ What GNSS Studio is GNSS Studio is the indispensable soft
218. nown control position The difference between the positions is com puted and presented A test then compares the user entered accuracy specifi cation to the computed accuracy for each control point Maximum acceptable control error parameter in Project Settings gt Miscellaneous tab e Ifthe QA test passes the computed accuracy of the tested control point meets the accuracy specification This is an indication that the control point can be fixed in the over constrained adjustment e If QA test fails the computed accuracy does not meet the accuracy spec ification Holding this control point fixed in an adjustment will cause a degradation of the network accuracy below the required accuracy specifi cation In such a case the control point should be examined in detail to determine if a blunder occurred during entry of the control values If no blunder is found a decision must be made to determine if this point should be held fixed in the final constrained adjustment 1 e do not hold the problem control point fixed in the final adjustment or hold it fixed despite its accuracy This is normally a decision made by the final recipi ent of the adjusted network 1 e the client 326 Appendices Using Datum Grids Using Datum Grids S GNSS Studio lets you work with the following datum grids NADCON P GR3DF97A These grids are somewhat hidden in the software To use any of them do the following when you create a coordinate system
219. ns and accuracies 308 Appendices Network Adjustment This chapter takes a step by step approach through the adjustment proce dure and highlights what tools you should use and when to use them Since it is task oriented it does not deal with the theory of adjustments in any depth Instead refer to Blunder Detection Tools on page 315 You will find it helpful to review this section before actually performing an adjustment gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq DRM Minimally Constrained Adjustment The first stage of adjusting your data set is to perform a minimally con strained adjustment the final product of this stage will be a blunder free ad justment 1 With an open project containing a processed data set click on the Adjust ment Analysis tab of the Workbook window 2 Notice all the fields are blank No data are available until you perform an adjustment on the data set k You may choose to hold one site fixed at this point However if you do not the software automatically uses the site with the lowest uncertainty It is important that you do not hold more than one site fixed 3 Press F7 to perform an adjustment or click the Adjust Network icon in the Commands pane Adjustment topic A progress dialog opens indicating the adjustment progress and status you may cancel the adjustment at any time Relevant messages are dis played in the Output pane 309 1 2 Appendices Network Adjustment 4
220. nsharaunventebaaes 205 LY Changing the minimum elevation cccccccsscceessccecesssecceseeceesseeecesseecessseeeeesaeeeenas 206 LY Applying removing the curtain ccccccccccccesscceessceecessseccesseeceesseeecesssecesseeeeesseecenas 207 World Map CC Ol csc25 2020228eotcaceae aap asenneeseetgusndsecnecncansotencteandcieceonesonaaeetciedsateeiant 208 Q Rotating the Fatt cisciicssascnteoerataicauseseaasancex aniauiaseiaiausw baad aad 208 ED ZG I sesso ceae cece A nossa triacs aA entice nee ees 209 HED Zone OU araa a E N AAAA E tn asses ado eden AE 209 m E a eS e E E E E EE N A E A E ernie 209 G Globe Viewing Ot ecceri eenia eNA EEE Aaa iNNi 210 CU e OT ee O E 211 VV Sa AA serci r N de esata E EENEN EAS 211 Q Accessing the curtain editor for a given observation POINt ccccccsecesseeeeeseeeees 211 Q Changing the curtain View sa dsvccsissaciesnssesceasasvesnascesiaadessaetaassadeseaisenscosecducsusenonsqoencsoeces 212 Q Drawing a curtain sa savessincansassesvinacectataradnensciesnassextsaaornasastiuengnastadescstoosstanwesicesennarsiees 212 GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents A Editing a c rtaii manually sais casrstxccsascecascvieceasesseetuceantsasietataawasaustqudeasiesassdyavsansinancgsnesan 213 LY Moving re shaping or deleting a CUIAII ccc ccccsecceesscceeesseeeeesseccesseeeeesseecesseeees 215 Chapter 5 WinComm Utility cassis ssessesvsiccsseccessssenessassaessistvatasescsseseivossicsaseese 217 roduc Oor EE
221. nt is a report Directly finds the next occurrence of the word or sentence that you have specified earlier in the Find command Replace Only if the active document is a report Same command as Find In addition you can replace the searched term with a word or sen tence that you specify 335 12 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Select All Insertion point must be in an open report document Selects the entire document Insert New Object Prompts you to enter a new object into the active report document at the insertion point Links For an object selected in the active report shows the definition of the link through which this object is present in the report in the case of an object inserted into the report by reference Objects Edits the selected object in the active report document LJ View Menu As Workbook Configures the View pane as a workbook 1 e with tabs in the lower part providing easy access to any open document Workspace Shows hides the workspace pane Output Shows hides the output pane Ruler Shows hides the ruler on top of the active report document Refresh Refreshes the content of the open map document Properties Shows the properties of the selected collection LJ Table Menu Available only if a table document is active in the View pane 336 Tab Provides aaccess to the Tab tab in the Table Properties dialog box Allows you to add new tabs to the table document and define their con te
222. nthe Workspace pane click on the Process topic bar and then on the Pro cess Options icon Inthe dialog box that appears use the horizontal scroll bar to access the Mode field located further to the right In this field select Dynamic on the drop down menu associated with this field Select the entire row by clicking the first cell in the row the one on the far left containing a pen icon As a result the row is now entirely high lighted ioixi ar 0001 50001 496 026 BKINMA 96 BKINMA 96 026 Dynamic Pone Reference Reference Data Rover Rover Data Note that the check box in the Done column has been cleared meaning that the process such as it is defined now 1 e with Dynamic selected as Mode option has not been run yet 54 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing In the lower part of the dialog box click on the OK button and then select To Save and Process selected Baselines Cancel To Save and Process selected Baselines To Save To Save Process selected baselines and Adjust IKE At the end of the processing phase the following information appears in the Survey View map document Click on the corresponding tab in the View pane to display this document see below m 3 m e pa m 7 2 56 01 39 50000 N 56 01 39 00000 N 56 01 36 S0000 H 56 01 36 00000 H 55 2 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go
223. nts attributes View Provides access to the View tab in the Table Properties dialog box Shows the spatial reference system and the time zone attached to the table document Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Data Provides access to the Data tab in the Table Properties dialog box Used to remove re arrange restore and filter the attributes present in a table document The types of attributes shown in a table document come from a given collection Sort Provides access to the Sort tab in the Table Properties dialog box Allows you to list the rows of attributes according to your criteria gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN LI Report Menu Available only if a report document is active in the View pane Font Lets you choose a font for the current selection Bullet Style Adds removes a bullet at the beginning of the current para graph Paragraph Lets you define the characteristics of the current paragraph Tabs Lets you set tabs for the current paragraph LI Graph Menu Available only if a graph document is active in the View pane Legend Provides access to the Legend tab in the Graph Properties dialog box View Provides access to the View tab in the Graph Properties dialog box Shows the spatial reference system and the time zone attached to the graph document Also lets you define a title for the graph The title will then appear above the graph in the document Zoom out Restores the normal non magni
224. o GNSS Studio Installation Before launching the program don t forget to connect the dongle to the PC s parallel or USB port depending on the model of dongle you ordered This dongle is part of the delivery if you have ordered a pro tection of the harware type With an absent dongle GNSS Studio will however run full featured for 30 days After this period of time GNSS Studio will refer to the content of the dongle to know which options are really enabled depending on the detail of the purchase Obviously if the dongle is still missing none of the software options will be availabe to the user at that time awa N Sy ou r m e Dongles are well suited for sedentary users especially if they wish to use GNSS Studio on two or more office computers Conversely users that travel extensively may be interested in having software protection devices installed on their PCs rather than easily mis laid dongles See Using a license File Rather Than a Dongle on page 7 for more information on this protection choice Remember however that this kind of protection cannot be moved from a PC to another as it is closely tied to the PC hardware To list the available software options after installation launch GNSS Stu dio To start GNSS Studio from the Windows task bar select succes sively Start Programs Thales Navigation and GNSS Studio Once the GNSS Studio main window is open on the GNSS Studio menu bar se
225. o edit curtains and to apply them to the ob servation point see below and Curtain editor on page 211 A curtain is a pattern representative of the obstructions around the observation point and li able to disturb the reception of GPS signals at this point 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 0 Almanacs used in the prediction Q Opening a set of almanacs When launching Mission Planning the set of almanacs last loaded is used To open a new set of almanacs Click on amp 4 or in the menu bar select File gt Open A dialog box opens showing the list of some of the almanac files stored in the Raw directory Inthe lower part of this box specify the format of the almanac file you would like to open The possible choices are ASCII raw Binary bin or dXX Ashtech almanac files a SEM almanacs from the US coast gards Sem txt Choose the desired set of almanacs from the files list then click Open to load it 186 Mission Planning Utility Almanacs used in the prediction LI Importing a new set of SEM type almanacs Using this function requires that your PC can be connected to the Internet Inthe menu bar select Help gt Get Almanacs A new dialog box opens asking you to confirm the address of the US coast guards site currently www navcen uscg gov with direct access to the almanac page ftp GPS alma nacs sem Get Almanacs Get SEM almanacs from internet web site
226. o the Existing List of Providers 292 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Chapter 12 Appendices gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Q Real Time Survey Tutorial 1 A Real Time Survey typically takes place according to the following scheme 1st step Create a new land survey project with GNSS Studio using the File gt New command 2nd step Prepare a job with GNSS Studio To do this in the open project create a map document to create import all the points needed for your survey reference target points An example of a job is shown on the map document below 3rd step Upload the job to the field system using the Project gt Upload Positions to External Device command 293 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter 4th step Perform the field survey Assuming the following survey example a base station is operated at an ac curately known point throughout the duration of the survey Another receiver the rover is used to take the field operator to the different points described in the job The field operator first surveys the reference points to calibrate the field sys tem Then she he navigates to each of the targets places stakes on these points and saves the position computed by the surveying equipment for fur ther cross checking In addition to the job itself the field operator can also compute and save the positio
227. ods of navigation Purchaser is advised to perform careful position charting and use good judg ment READ THE USER GUIDE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT 1 THALES NAVIGATION WARRANTY Thales Navigation warrants their GPS receivers and hardware accessories to be free of defects in material and workmanship and will conform to our published specifications for the product for a period of one year from the date of original purchase or such longer period as required by law THIS WARRANTY APPLIES ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT In the event of a defect Thales Navigation will at its option repair or replace the hardware product with no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor The repaired or replaced product will be warranted for 90 days from the date of return shipment or for the balance of the original warranty whichever is longer Thales Navigation war rants that software products or software included in hardware products will be free from defects in the media for a period of 30 days from the date of shipment and will substantially conform to the then current user documentation provided with the software including updates thereto Thales Navigation s sole obligation shall be the correction or replacement of the media or the software so that it will substantially conform to the then current user docu mentation Thales Navigation does not warrant the software will meet purchaser s requirements or that its opera tion will be unin
228. oject option on the left are selected by default In the Project name field type a name for the new project For example type Tuto 1 Projects Workspaces 4 Land Survey Project Project name 7 Background Maps Project Tuto Create new workspace Add to current work space IV Use default settings Modify Default Settings Cancel Click on the Modify Default Settings button This opens the Default Project Settings window with the Region tab selected by default Inthe list attached to the Spatial Reference System field select lt New gt In the new dialog box that opens the SELECT a PREDEFINED system option is checked by default Keep this default selection and simply click on the Next gt button 12 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Inthe new dialog box that appears make the following selection dinate System Wizard Select Ja Predefined csl H T AUSTRALIA H AUSTRIA ia SF BELGIUM T FRANCE NTF Lambert III NTF Gh CHINA EFRANCE NTF Lambert I v NTF oe ae FRANCE NTF Lambert zone NTF oy FRANCE L EERAMCE N TE amben zone Il MTF aes 7 RGF93 L ERRANCE NTE Lamber zone Ill NTF e 1 FRANCE NTF Lambert zone M NTF ke NTF Grid H T GERMANY H GREECE _ fe HONG KONG Click Finish This takes you back to the previous dialog box where the name of the chosen system now appears in the upper field In the Time zone and Linear unit fields underneath ma
229. on These fields allow you to define the period of time for which you want data from your provider The End date and End time fields are software set for your information after you have set these 3 fields To change the Start date click on the corresponding down arrow A cal endar is then displayed EE Janay ES gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 31 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 4 5 N J E m 5 6 7 amp Today 1 15 2004 a lt 287 1 1 Internet Download Using Internet Download e Click on the displayed year and use the up down arrows next to it to set the year e Click on the right left arrow to set the month e Click on the day number to set the day This closes the calendar Target Path This field allows you to define the folder where you want Internet Download to store the downloaded files To do this click on H browse your disk until you can select the desired folder name and then click OK The selected folder and its path will then appear in the Target Path field Download button Click on this button when you agree with all the settings in the window and you want to start downloading data Below is an example of the message lines that appear in the output pane located in the lower part of the window as raw data downloading takes place Connecting to Host cddisa gsfc nasa gov Ok Searching for file pub gps gpsdata 04013 04d
230. on this type of survey 59 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Q 60 Average time required to complete this tutorial 25 minutes Preamble The purpose of this tutorial is to make you familiar with the use of GNSS Stu dio in static surveys You will work on an example of a geodetic network survey In this type of survey operators customarily introduce a significant amount of redundancy in their observations for the purpose of securing their results in terms of pre cision In this example you will assume that among the points that have been sur veyed in the field three of them are known points The first one will provide a horizontal 2D reference the second a vertical 1D reference and the last one a 3D reference At one step in the post processing you will allow GNSS Studio to use two of these points as fixed control points meaning that you will introduce their true coordinate in the processing instead of those provided by the field survey You will also use a third known point as an additional control point for the sole purpose of making sure the required level of accuracy has effectively been achieved in the survey Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network LI Step 1 Creating a project Inthe Workspace pane click on the Create New Project icon In the New dialog box that opens select the Land Survey Project opt
231. onfig uration currently enabled so that you can quickly retrieve it at a later date us ing the Load Settings button It can be loaded automatically if you specify its name in the command line of any shortcut icon created to start Wincomm In the File Name text box enter a name e g the type of the receiver connected for the file to which the serial port configuration should be saved typically with set as the extension name and saved to the set directory Clicking the Save button saves the following communication parameters Serial port No Baud rate Number of bits per character Parity check option Number of stop bits Clicking Cancel would take you back to the Communication Settings dialog box without saving any settings O Z 221 A WinComm Utility System Menu System Menu Inthe left corner of the WinComm window s title bar click on the connec tor icon The system menu appears from which you can define the options below Move Close Alt F4 W All Commands Uppercase w Ho Internal Memory About Terminal All Commands Uppercase Unless you are satisfied with the current set ting select this command to toggle the setting Checked lower case characters in the command are changed to upper case characters before being sent to the receiver Cleared characters whether lower case or upper case are sent unchanged No internal Memory Command not used with the new range of re
232. only if your receiver is capable of receiving GLONASS signals Click this box to create a B file position data when converting RINEX files Click this box to create a E file ephemeris data when converting RINEX files S File Click this box to create a S file site information when converting RINEX files The S file is created only if site data is included in the RINEX file Closes RINEX Converter Displays software version number Opens the help system file Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format This field displays the available disk drive space for the selected output directory Rinex files from any GPS receiver can be converted to Ashtech format for post processing The following procedure specifies how to convert RINEX data files to Ashtech format 1 In the RINEX to Ashtech dialog box click Input dir to open the Set input directory dialog box Set input directory EAE Save in E Rinexin gt fad la ashi S4n a _ash1311 940 a 00051311 94n f 00051311 940 Cancel Files of Type RINEX FILES 70 n m g _ 264 RINEX Converter Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format 2 Using standard Windows file navigation procedure navigate to the direc tory where the RINEX input files are located and then click Save k Ifyou are converting RINEX files translated from a RINEX converter that does not use the standard RINEX naming format the observation files may not have the format
233. ontaining the text displayed in the Output pane for the project messages processing reports etc wsp file containing the current settings of GNSS Studio main window for this workspace i gph graph documents DBP Background project database 333 Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar GNSS Studio Menu Bar This chapter briefly reviews all the commands available from the GNSS Stu dio menu bar Some of them are also described in detail elsewhere in the manual but some others are only presented in this chapter LJ File Menu New Opens the New dialog box to create a document project or work space Close xxx Closes the active document xxx table graph report or map Save xxx As Saves the active document xxx table graph report or map Save as default xxx Saves the active document as a template xxx table graph report or map This template will be automatically used next time you create another document of the same type 1 e table graph report or map Restore to default xxx Available only if one of the project s default docu ments is currently active in GNSS Studio xxx table or map Allows you to restore the default legend attached to the document May be useful if you have made changes to the legend and you want to come back to the default legend Open Workspace Opens the workspace that you choose in the list of workspaces If a workspace is already open in GNSS Studio this work sp
234. ontrol Control type 123 Status Survey status Spatial Reference System 123 Constraints Coordinate constraints FelambenlE a ai 23 Use Use in calibration 23 Ctrl_Easting Control easting 123 Ctrl_Northing Control northing Ctrl_Latitude Control latitude CtrlLongitude Control longitude ae Co Cine the I rebel Mie omie be lad lt OK Cancel 132 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The first tab lists all the classic attributes one dimensional text numeric or Boolean type The second one shows the geometric attribute multi dimensional There are three possible types of geometric attributes Point defined by a set of coordinates expressed on a specific coordi nate system Line defined by two or more sets of coordinates expressed on a spe cific coordinate system Area defined by a close line The Appendix section reviews all the possible collections in a land sur vey project and also lists all the attributes pertaining to each of these col lections LI Editing the Properties of an Object General Case To edit an object i e a file a point a vector a line or an area from a collec tion stored in the project database you must have access to its properties This can only be achieved from within a map or table document created in the project Whatever the document you use to do this the changes will then appear in both documents and also in any other document present i
235. onverted files and then click Save k To avoid confusion save the converted Ashtech files to a directory different than where the RINEX files are located On the Rinex to Ashtech tab the Output Directory list now shows the direc tory path k To avoid confusion do not change the suggested file names To restore the original suggested output file name double click the filename in the available files list 266 RINEX Converter Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format 6 Click the arrow to the right of the Overwrite files list and select an option from the list There are three overwrite options Prompt for Overwrite Default setting If RINEX Converter detects that a converted file has the same name as an existing file meaning the new file will overwrite the existing file a dialog box asks if you wish to overwrite the existing file If you click NO RINEX Con verter skips the file and continues to the next file Always Overwrite This option always writes over existing files with a new file Never Overwrite This option does not overwrite data for a given file if a file with the same name already exists By default RINEX Converter assumes that the RINEX files use both GPS and GLONASS Nav g data however there is no Nav g file unless a GLO NASS receiver was used to collect data By default RINEX Converter creates a B File GPS position data an E File satellite ephemeris and an S File site parameters if reco
236. or which Type 10 will appear on the map For more details see Adding a New Layer to a Map Document on page 163 To conclude this overview chapter about map documents let us introduce the following two important terms Layer visual result on the map of a style and a filter applied to a collec tion of objects Legend the set of layers defined in a map document Knowing these definitions helps you understand what a map document really is In fact when you save a map you just save its legend Reference Working in a Land Survey Project It is easy to imagine how interesting map documents are What appears when you open the map document depends on the contents of the project database that time The same map can show very different things at different times for example at the beginning and then at the end of a survey Finally once you have defined a map document with a nice legend that you would like to re use in future maps you can save this map document as a de fault map document All projects created later will then include this default document Project Settings The 3 tab dialog box described below is displayed when you click on the Modify Default Settings button in the New dialog box when you are creating a new project or if you click on the Project topic bar in the Commands tab and then on the Project Settings icon once a project is open in GNSS Studio 7 O oO O 1 Project Settings Region Tab
237. ore GNSS Studio actually does it Appendices GNSS Studio Menu Bar Process All Baselines Processes all the baselines reported in the scenario see command above The result of each processed baseline is a vector Process Unprocessed Baselines Same as previous command but only the still unprocessed baselines will be processed gt ge gS a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Process Options Opens a secondary window showing the process sce nario You can make changes to this scenario and then save the changes made Clear Process Results Deletes all the baseline processing results present in the project Adjust Network Runs network adjustment based on all the enabled vec tors present in the active project Check Loop Closure Runs a loop closure test on the selected vectors three at least forming one or more loops The results of the test provides the components of misclosures All 0 if loops close perfectly Clear Adjustment Results Deletes all the adjustment results present in the project Edit Feature Code List Shows the Feature Code List tab in the Project Settings dialog box This tab allows you to define new feature codes in the project Set Feature Codes Typically after selecting a number of points on the Design View map document you select this function to assign one of the available feature codes to all these points Process Feature Codes After assigning feature codes to your points you
238. orting raw data files and before running the base line processing Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Process topic bar and then on the Process options icon equivalent function on the menu bar Project gt Process Options The dialog box that opens shows the processing scenario An example of processing scenario is shown in the figure below b0014a98 273 b0005a98 273 Static M PALO b0014a98 273 PARK b0008b98 273 Static m pao bo0t4ag8 273 Disc b1112a98 273 Static M PALO b001 4898 273 PARK b0008a98 273 Static M PALO b001 4898 273 MISS b1112b98 273 Static zo mM J886 b0005a98 273 MISS b1112b98 273 Static er M J886 b0005a98 273 DISC 61112a98 273 Static T _ s886 bo005a98 273 PARK b000898 273 Static M J886 b0005a98 273 PARK b0008a98 273 Static g m rr imams a AA a man tasin RAR Aawa oe The processing scenario consists of a series of processes In the Process Options dialog box each process occupies a row A process describes the way a baseline can be processed to produce one or more vectors one in static several in dynamic or Stop amp Go GNSS Studio automatically builds the processing scenario after you import raw data files into the project or when you run the Project gt Rebuild Process Scenario command The way GNSS Studio operates to determine the scenario relies on the principle explained hereafter GNSS Studio
239. ositions to External Device Command icons available Export Positions to File in the open topic Selected topic Topic bars Land Survey Report F9 Utilities 78 Reference Introduction LJ View Pane The View pane allows you to display all the documents that you create in a project Use the following tools to control the display of your documents The View gt As Workbook option allows you to fit your open documents with tabs All the tabs are grouped in the lower part of the View pane You can then easily view a document by simply clicking on the corresponding tab A very interesting of this feature when used is that you can know at a glance which documents are currently open If you clear the View gt As Workbook option all tabs disappear from the View pane but you can still read the list of all the currently open documents by selecting the Window menu The list appears at the bottom of the menu The Dock button 24 located in the right upper edge of each document window allows you to keep this document always displayed Once you have docked the document move it to the desired location by dragging it from its title bar While dragging GNSS Studio will draw an empty frame indicative of the final size and shape of the document depending on where the mouse cursor is When you agree with the location and shape just release the mouse button and the document will appear where desired You can dock several do
240. ote Machine N lt S Directory Enter directory to create Dir Name Local PL C Remote Machine Cancel Type in a directory name you want to create choose Local PC or Remote Machine and then press OK If you enter an invalid directory name it will not be created Invalid directory names are determined by the operating system delete Delete button This command allows you to delete files and empty directories Click this button after selecting the item s you want to delete Depending on the Confirm Delete option chosen with the Options button a message will appear or not asking you to confirm deleting these items 257 SurvCom Utility Commands Available Options Options button This command allows you to set various options When you click the Options button the following dialog box opens on the screen Options File Mask HRI Directory Sort BY NAME Display Special Files MD Confirm Overvarite YESS Confirm Delete YES Baud Rate 3400 Protect Remote Files TES OF Cancel Com Port You must select which COM port on the PC to use File Mask You must select a file filtering syntax will show all files Directory Sort You must select how to sort the list of files by name date or size or no sorting Display Special Files Toggle whether or not you should see special files Confirm
241. ou wish to record the data from the receiver Clicking the button to the right opens a dialog box that allows you to navigate through the directory tree on your hard disk or a floppy disk and select the desired destination directory 229 WinComm Utility Programmable GPS recorder 230 File Name Used to specify the name of the file to which you wish to record the data from the receiver If you choose the Automatic File Name option i e if the option box is checked then the File Name text box is dimmed and the name is automatically assigned by the system based on the date month day number and time hour minute of the recording session Example 12240929 for a file recorded on December 24 at 9 29 a m Ifyou do not select the Automatic File Name option then you can enter a name of your own Unless a maximum size is selected for the file you are also allowed to enter an extension into the associated box File Max Size Used to specify whether a single file should be created on the disk No Limits option or the file should be split into 0 7 MB or 1 4 MB segments with an option to store it on floppy disks If you elect to split the file into segments then the system will automati cally add 001 as extension to the name of the first segment This will automatically be incremented for each file segment generated if the file exceeds the File Max Size selected Start Date Used to specify the day on which the recor
242. ox opens allowing you to modify the set of satellites involved in the prediction The first time you display this box for any given prediction all visible satellites have been selected to be used in the prediction Satellite num bers PRN shown in black letters stand for the visible satellites whereas those in white stand for the non visible ones All buttons are in the OFF position i e released The changes you can make are the follow ing Deselecting a satellite depress the corresponding button UOISSIJA az a 5 jul e va 205 Mission Planning Utility Changing the prediction options Deselecting all satellites click on the All button Re selecting a satellite that you have previously deselected click on the corresponding button which then comes back to the OFF position Re selecting the complete set of visible satellites click on the None button Example of settings on the SVs Deselection box SVs Deselection Deselected Sws In this example satellites No 12 16 and 32 are not visible satellite No 22 is vis ible but deselected satellite No 32 is not visible and furthermore is deselected All other satellites are visible and used Q Changing the minimum elevation 206 Click on W or on the menu bar select Options gt Elev Min A dialog box opens allowing you to change the value of the minimum elevation angle under which any satellite should be seen from the obs
243. pation D Time_Span Time span of occupation 123 File Raw data file 2 Antenna_Height Antenna height during occupation 123 Height_Type Antenna height type X Init_On_Bar Kinematic initialisation point using initializer bar LJ Areas Collection Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D area expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following classic attributes Pie Name Ate Description Pie Layer Ae Comment 2 2D_Lenath 2 3D_Lenath bg Area Area name Feature code Layer name Free notes Area 2D perimeter Area 3D perimeter Surface area LJ Lines Collection Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D line expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following classic attributes Abe Name te Description Pe Layer Ate Comment 2 2D_Length 2 gt 3D_Lenath Line name Feature code Layer name Free notes Line 2D length Line 3D lenath 329 Appendices 1 2 Database in a Land Survey Project Q Points Collection Each object in this collection is of the geometric type 3D point expressed in a specified coordinate system and also has the following attributes At Name 123 Type Description Pe Layer Comment 23 Control 123 Status 123 Constraints 23 Use 123 Ctrl_Easting 23 Ctrl_Northing Ctrl_Latitude Ctrl_Longitude 123 Ctrl_Height_Sd 23 Ctrl_Easting_ 723 CtrlHorz_Conf 923 Ctrl_Height_C 29 C
244. pe of fix computation envisaged at the observation point so that Mission Planning can determine the corresponding DOP values Select Options gt 3D T or Options gt 2D T 2D T should be chosen if the altitude is known and constant throughout the working area around the observation point otherwise choose 3D T In 2D T only 2 position unknowns instead of 3 are involved in the GDOP computation This naturally results in better lower GDOP fig ures Example of GDOP view Geometric Dilution of Precision 3D T At Site Biarritz 43 28 59 0000 N 1 34 5 0000 W 2 022 m From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ev Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored 10 100 9h Om Os Local Time 12h Om Os 202 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI Displaying 4 or 2 different views at the same time Select View gt Split and then click in the middle of the window with the left mouse button The window is split into 4 areas each of them showing a different view of the prediction Example of a screen showing 4 different views at the same time Ele Edt Wew Opens Heb 2 SID Lla Olsi wele Predicted SVs Elevation Predicted SVs Azemuth Ebevation At Ste imiz 47209 OOO N 1 SCO w 202 m From an 2001 Sh Ore Os Toan 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 Wi anana may J1 2001 Ev Nit 5 0 deg Cutten ignored On pas A 2001 10h Ine 0 Ev ial
245. play Ruler M Display Grid Select the desired system from the list attached to the Spatial Reference Sys tem field a combo box Note that you can also change the map viewing options from this dialog box Checking the Display Ruler box displays grid coordinates on the map Checking the Display Grid box displays grid lines on the map 83 Q 84 Reference Coordinate Systems Click OK to close this dialog box and enable the new coordinate system The map is then updated to reflect the change made To change the coordinate system used in the active table document Right click anywhere on the table and select View in the menu that pops up The View dialog box opens Select the desired system from the list attached to the Spatial Reference Sys tem field a combo box Note that you can also change the time zone Click OK to close this dialog box and enable the new coordinate system The table is then updated to reflect the change made Creating a Projected System The process of creating a new projected system goes through three distinct phases corresponding to three different dialog boxes as explained below To access the first of these dialog boxes do the following Run the Tools gt Coordinate Systems command Click 2 check the Define a NEW PROJECTED system option and click the Next button This opens the Wizard Datum dialog box continued below Reference Coordinate Systems 1 Defining t
246. ple choose Project as shown in the figure below and check the second option in the lower part of the box me wk x Look In lob TUTO 100 Calibration Projected System Lambert NTF ee Projected System Lambert 93 RGF93 Z The job coordinate system is different from the project system Please select the coordinate system you want to keep for your project Edit The project coordinate system will be changed All local coordinates in the project will be En recalculated from the WihSe4 coodinates with the job system tt The local coordinates in the job will be kept Cancel Ik ig the case if the base coordinates are approximate and a calibration has been done i The local coordinates in the job will be recalculated from WG584 coordinates with the project system 23 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click Go This starts the download operation Once download is com plete the map in the Survey View document looks like this FRANCE NTF Lambert Il 303000 00 24 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 7 Analyzing the Content of the Project after Down loading Results Inthe View pane zoom in on the area containing points using the zoom in button from the Map toolbar To do this draw a rectangle around this area and release the mouse button You should then get a view like this one x FRANCE NTF Lambert Il N R vie 1 o Mia co P PT30 yak EN i
247. ppler view Predicted S s Doppler At Site Bartz 43 28 59 OO00 N 1 34 5 0000 2 022 mm From jun 6 2001 9h Orn Os To jun 6 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ey Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored 10007 1000 9h Orn Os Local Time 12h Om Os 198 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LI Elevation view This view shows the variations of elevation for each of the visible satellites during the prediction Example of Elevation view Predicted S s Elevation At Site Biamtz 43 26 59 OOOOH 1 34 5 0000 2 022 m From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ey Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored gh m Os Local Time 199 az a 5 jul e tie UoISSIN Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LU Azimuth view This view shows the variations of azimuth for each of the visible satellites during the prediction Example of Azimuth view Predicted S s Azimuth At Site Biarmitz 43 26 59 OOOOH 1 34 5 0000 W 2 022 rm From jun 6 2001 9h Om Os To jun 6 2001 12h Om Os UTC 01 00 00 With almanac may 31 2001 Ey Min 5 0 deg Curtain ignored gh m Os Local Time 12h Om Os 200 Mission Planning Utility Prediction results LJ Polar view This view shows the orbit of each of the visible satellites above the observa tion point for the whole prediction time as well as the
248. pplers preferably ki 75 ms stands for the average propagation time of GPS signals between any satellite and any receiver on Earth It is therefore the best value a priori to use in the conversion 284 Internet Download Introduction Chapter 11 Internet Download Introduction This utility program allows you to download RINEX raw data or precise or bit data from a provider via the web You can use Internet Download in standalone or when importing files to the active project In the latter case Internet Download will automatically set the Start date Start time and Duration fields to fit the observations files you have se lected for import This means Internet Download will by default ask the data provider to send data for the same period of time as the observation files To run Internet Download in standalone just select Start gt Programs gt THALES Navigation gt Internet Download or click on the Internet Download icon in the Utili ties topic To run Internet Download from the Importing GPS Data window click on the Add Raw Data button and then select Downloaded from Internet You can also run Internet Download by clicking on the Internet Download icon in the Import topic In this case Internet Download will automatically set the Start date Start time and Duration fields to fit the observations files present in the open project os o Fer oS Se Ou 285 1 1 Internet Download Introduction The Inter
249. predic tion Each set of almanac data provides the orbital parameters for the whole GPS constellation Almanacs are assumed to be valid for a period of time centered around a reference time called TOA Time Of Almanac The closer to the time of prediction the TOA of the chosen almanacs the more reliable the prediction 183 Mission Planning Utility Introduction Mission Planning allows you to import new sets of almanac data saved in Tha les Navigation formats SFIX SVAR or SBIN or of the following type SEM lt Week No gt TXT almanac files downloaded from the US coastguards site www navcen uscg gov Mission Planning can also display the set of almanacs used see below Prediction Almanac 1 29 Thursday May 31 2001 16 38 24 cy PAR Health 0 Eccentricity 0 51 250455E 2 Time of Applicability 405504 Orbital Inclination AA Te 5 6433 Rate of Aight Ascen degs 4 E428E 7 Semi Major Axis m 6550562 250 Right Ascen at TOA 21234 6 6688 Argument of Pergee be 46 59 SO54 Mean Anom Tee 41 68 SY Clock Bias AO Ls 180 2444 SW Clock Dritt AH n 0 0000 Week 1116 Page Down 184 Mission Planning Utility Introduction Mission Planning produces the following views to help you analyze the results of the prediction At Time Schedule Range Prediciad Siva Ar Tita do Sir Beene A 1 ee a From pr AN Ses he Ton OS idh ee IC a i oy Ses ire TY TTT A y ey
250. project 6 Assigning PO to the file also allows GNSS Studio to locate the file on a map PO is definitively tied to the file whereas the same PO assigned to the point will be updated as new computations are run to refine this position 303 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter Inthe project database GNSS Studio searches for files that coincide in time partially or completely with the file that has just been created Ifconcomitant files are found new objects are created in the Processes collection Each of these objects describes a baseline The baseline is oriented in such a way that the first point mentioned is more likely than the other to be a reference point The probability is all the more important as the point is Held fixed by the user Involved in a large number of baselines Associated with a long observation 3 Baseline Processing Project gt Process All Baselines command To process a baseline GNSS Studio needs The point providing the reference position A file the reference point is associated with The surveyed point name A file the surveyed point is associated with An indication on the processing mode to use static for all surveys of the type described in Tutorial 3 To know the processing options 7 A baseline is defined as the straight line between the two points associated with a pair of simultaneous observation files 304 Appendices Supplemen
251. r system compatible with the RINEX format Internet Download allows you to download compact RINEX raw data or precise orbit files from the FTP site you choose 3 Introduction to GNSS Studio Installation Installation Q 4 Minimum System Requirements Personal Computer PC type Operating system Windows 95 IE4 98 Me NT 2000 XP Processor Pentium 100 MHz or faster RAM minimum 64 MB Space occupied on hard disk without user data 16 MB approx 80 MB required in the Common files folder Windows drive for geoid mod els datum amp projection grids CD ROM drive PC card drive is recommended if you use receivers collecting their field data on PC Cards One or more RS232 or USB serial ports Installing GNSS Studio Close all the applications running in Windows Insert the GNSS Studio CD ROM in the drive The Autorun program should normally start automatically If an earlier version of GNSS Studio is present on your computer the installation program will first ask you to uninstall this earler version You will then have to re launch manually the installation program If the Autorun program does not start automatically from the CD ROM in the Windows task bar click on Start and select Run Type x setup where x is the name of the CD ROM drive and then press Enter After you specify where to install GNSS Studio programs and projects your computer will complete the installation process Introduction t
252. r posi tioned last in the list is sent to the back on the map 167 Reference Working in a Map Document Click OK to close the dialog box Click to update the map which should now show the control point you have created at the beginning of this chapter as only this point meets the criteria defined in the layer you have just created LI Deleting an object in a collection from a map document On the map select the object you want to delete Press the Del key or on the menu bar select Edit gt Delete A warning mes sage appears asking you to confirm your choice Click Yes to allow GNSS Studio to delete the object LJ Default Map Documents Two map documents are automatically created when you create a new land survey project Survey view and Design view The legends of these docu ments are designed in such a way that these two documents give an exhaus tive view of your projects from two different angles The surveyor s angle Survey view showing the details of the survey baselines vectors etc The customer s angle Design view showing only the results locations of features 168 Reference Working in a Table Document Working in a Table Document Table documents may consist of one or more tabs Each tab contains a table that you can customize according to your needs For instance you can add delete data columns place a filter to list only those objects meeting the filter criteria or list the
253. rant the software will meet purchaser s requirements or that its opera tion will be uninterrupted error free or virus free Purchaser assumes the entire risk of using the software PURCHASER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WAR RANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AT THALES NAVIGATION S OPTION OF ANY DEFECTIVE PART OF THE RECEIVER OR ACCESSORIES WHICH ARE COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY REPAIRS UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL ONLY BE MADE AT AN AUTHO RIZED THALES NAVIGATION SERVICE CENTER ANY REPAIRS BY A SERVICE CENTER NOT AUTHORIZED BY THALES NAVIGATION WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY To obtain warranty service the purchaser must obtain a Return Materials Authorization RMA number prior to shipping by calling 800 229 2400 U S or 408 615 3981 International or by sending a repair request on line at http products thalesnavigation com en support rma asp The purchaser must return the product postpaid with a copy of the original sales receipt to the address provided by Thales Navigation with the RMA number Pur chaser s return address and the RMA number must be clearly printed on the outside of the package Thales Navigation reserves the right to refuse to provide service free of charge if the sales receipt is not provided or if the information contained in it is incomplete or illegible or if the serial number is altered or removed Thales Navigation will not be responsible for any losses or damage to the product inc
254. rded in Ashtech format If you do not want one or more of these file types created click the corresponding check boxes to remove the check mark Be aware that the S file is not created unless the site information is recorded in the receiver file 267 RINEX Converter Converting RINEX to Ashtech Format 7 Click BEGIN to convert the selected RINEX files to Ashtech format The Conversion status dialog box opens see figure below Conversion status Pel F3 complete Bfile B ASHA94131 TN Efile F ASHAS4 131 Fon Sfle Comments A D RINEXCONVERTERINOUTFOLDERS ASHOUTSB_ASHA94 131 D RINEXCONVERTERINOUTFOLDERS SASHOUTSE_ASHAS4 131 B file D SRINEXCONVERTERINOUTFOLDERS ASHOUTSB_ASHAS4 1 E file D RINEXCONVERTERINOUTFOLDERSSASHOUTSE ASHAS4 1 Write logfile D NPROGHAM FILES THALES NAVIGATIONNGNSS STURT OK 8 The Conversion status dialog box shows the status of each file as it is con verted Upon completion the display indicates 100 for each file or 0 if a file were not converted for lack of data e g GLONASS data as noted above During conversion you can Click Cancel to cancel the conversion to the current file type and pro ceed to the next file type Click Cancel All to cancel the entire conversion 9 Once conversion is complete if you let RINEX converter complete this work click OK to close the Conversion status dialog box A log file is created in the directory conta
255. reating a Graph Document in an Open Project On the menu bar select File gt New Select Graph on the Documents tab Name the new document by typing a name in the File Name field for example type Graph1 Click OK A new blank graph document opens on the View pane LI Defining the X and Y Axes Select one or two columns in the workbook that you want to represent on the graph If the second column is not adjacent to the first one press the Ctrl key before clicking on the header of this column If you select a single column then its content will be used to define the Y axis and a dimensionless linear scale will be used as default setting on the X axis In the Workbook document select the Surv_Horz_Conf column by clicking in the column header Drag and drop the column header in the Graph document 7 O oO O A graph now appears in the graph document as shown below 179 3 Reference Working in a Graph Document 0 Index 0 Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index Surv Horz Conf Graph1 gph BA Survey Vie No constraints LJ Adding a new curve on the same graph Right click anywhere within the graph document and select Legend in the pop up menu The Graph Properties dialog box opens On the Legend tab click Select Surv Height Conf in the PLOT field located in the Data area at the bottom of the dialog box 180 Refer
256. rio when you choose this option 111 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project e Use To Import Process and Adjust if you want to obtain the results in the fastest possible manner This implies however that you entirely rely on GNSS Studio in the choices of the processing options since you will not be able to check the processing scenario or analyze the raw results before network adjustment You will however be able to thoroughly check all the results once they are made available on the screen LI Importing Positions From Files Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Import topic bar and then on the Import Positions from Files icon Choose the type of data you want to import and then click OK The table below summarizes all the input formats supported by GNSS Studio ver sus the type of imported data Import Format Points Vectors Features wea e o mses e C GROW wrae f e a o Pasties OA AuoCAD OXF A o Browse on your disk to select the folder containing the files to import and then select these files Click the Open button GNSS Studio then imports the data contained in the chosen file s into the open project A message in the Output pane indicates the end of data import The imported data can be seen in the dif ferent open documents Map View Workbook etc 112 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Checking the Processing Options Run this function after imp
257. rmer command in which the Download module is involved is used to download AND convert the raw data files that come direct from the field and that Download splits up into several files for GNSS Studio to process them 7 O oO O O O 107 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Q Importing Data from Files 108 In the Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Import topic bar and then on the Import Raw Data from Files icon Choose the type of data you want to import The table below summarizes all the input formats supported by GNSS Studio Import Format Ashtech B file DSNP var bin or D file RINEX 70 file Browse on your disk to select the folder containing the files to import and then select these files Click the Open button This opens the Importing GPS Data dialog box see dialog example in next figure This dialog 1s one of the key dialog boxes in GNSS Studio for post processing applications as it gives you full view upon and full control over what s going to be post processed and how Reference Working in a Land Survey Project _ Use this table to define Displays data of selected file your control points Displays Time View Importing GPS Data F l ooo ES September 301998 20 17 50 0 925 Vertical 8003 18 00 30 0 625 Vertical 800372 PARK September 301998 19 07 00 0 1 625 Vertical 800372 September 301998 17 51 20 0 1 925 Vertica
258. rming a loop on the Survey View Inthe Workspace pane click on the Adjustment topic bar and then on the Check Loop Closure icon GNSS Studio then performs the loop closure test on these vectors At the end of the test GNSS Studio selects the Loop Clo sure tab in the Workbook window so you can read the results of the test Workbook tbl Tuto_3 WGS 84 Meters toop toon tena ca iaae mea oa 51195 5609 0 006 0 013 0 009 0 017 Loop Properties za Select a row on the Loop Closure tab in the workbook oO a pn Right click and select Properties A new two tab dialog box is displayed T showing the content of the selected row in a different form x Vectors Misclosure c x Reference Rover Start_Time Vectors Misclosure PALO J886 September 30 19 J386 MISS September 30 19 Total Loop Length 51 195 603 PALO MISS September 30 19 x Misclosure poe Y Misclosure jam lt Ci S Z Misclosure oos Length Misclosure par 00t i S e Gie CPM C Pato 121 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project The first tab shows the points involved in the definition of the vectors forming the loop The second tab give the same results as in the row except that you can choose to view the misclosure results either in a lin ear ppm or ratio form LI Editing the Feature Code List Editing and adding new feature codes are part of the functions grouped in the Project Setti
259. rogress Use PC Card in 6000 102 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Downloading Field Results The diagram below summarizes the different steps through which GNSS Stu dio can retrieve field data collected by a Z Max 6500 or 6000 Z max 6500 6000 Switch on data collector Connect Husky to Insert PC Card for Launch FAST Survey PC via serial cable 6000 in office PC and Data Transfer Utility On Husky run drive Hcom by typing h Select Project gt Download Positions from External Device Select type of data to be downloaded real time results and device from which to download Z max data collector 6500 data collector 6000 PC Card oOo 7 O oO O Click OK Click OK Click OK Y Y Specify PC port involved Specify path to PC Card drive Manual Transfer Click OK Click OK Click OK Choose Automatic or Select the job you want to download Click OK Click OK Click OK Job Download in progress Choose coordinate system End if different from the project s 103 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LI Uploading Waypoints amp Control Points to ProMark2 Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Export topic bar and then on the Upload Positions to External Device icon Inthe dialog that opens make the following selections Upload Positions to External Dev
260. rs max Default lt Geoid model name gt Comment 25 characters max It will appear in the 3rd line when you open the geoid model Geographical limits of the considered region necessarily a rectan gular area defined by a North West point NW and a South East point SE NW Point NN SE Point Define the NW amp SE points manually by entering their latitudes amp longitudes in the corresponding fields or graphically using the World Map editor To use the World Map editor click on the World Map button and then refer to World Map editor on page 208 GNSS Studio Follow the instructions provided in this section except for the Draw function which in the present case must be used to surround the desired region 4 Click on the Extract button to extract the data from the geoid model for the concerned region The resulting file is automatically opened in the Geoids window once it has been created 237 Geoids Utility Uploading a Geoid Model into a System Example of data extraction using the World Map editor Fasa RAF POL Tha tas 06713701 0 45 17 da KE Loses t Pea t n Herth qeasads nalea af 3 0 OO00 H coer ne coon u Shakl Heat a 2 UNNT NH iah aH UO Saenger Cerro ih paoe Eat x ome saoirse step 2 00 Husber of points DEII Geographi Selected Fields automatically Resulting geoid model cal area cov region filled after making a for the selected region ered by initial selec
261. rted raw data files observation files versus time Inside rectangles showing the time spans of observation files are the names of the points where static occupations took place The first 5 buttons from the map toolbar can be used on the Time view This means you can perform the following actions on the Time view select zoom in zoom out zoom to fit and grab Note A click on E when the Importing GPS data window is open see Step 2 Downloading Processing Raw Data on page 62 allows you to display the Time view BEFORE importing data files 68 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network LI Step 4 Creating a Map Showing the Precision Results In this step you will create a map document showing the level of horizontal precision achieved for each of the surveyed points Inthe Workspace pane click on the Project topic bar and then on the Cre ate New Document icon On the Documents tab of the New dialog box that opens select Map in the list and overwrite Document with Precision results in the File Name field on the right Click OK to close this dialog box The new map document now appears in the View pane 3 m e pa m AN On the Workspace pane select the Collections tab and then drag and drop the Points collection in the new map document The Layer Wizard Data dia log box opens Click the Next gt button In the Layer Wizard Style dialog box that appears make
262. rvey Project The check boxes before the coordinate fields allow you to fix the coordi nates of the point What you do when you check one of these boxes is that you overwrite the survey coordinate with the control coordinate The status of each coordinate 1s provided between square brackets after each coordinate label and depends on how far you are in the survey and the way you want GNSS Studio to handle these coordinates The possible values of status are Imported Estimated Processed Static Processed Dynamic Fixed and Adjusted 4 This area is displayed only when both control AND survey coordinates areas are displayed It shows the deviation error between each control and survey coordinate of the point A total error is also provided on top of the ar ea If it is shown on a green background this means that the total error is less than the Maximum acceptable control error see Project gt Edit settings Miscellaneous tab Otherwise it will appear on a red background 5 This area provides a geographical representation of the point The point s control coordinates if any always define the center of the chart whereas the point s survey coordinates can be anywhere on the chart depend ing on the position deviation produced by the two sets of coordinates 7 O oO O Editing a Vector The properties of a vector are presented on a two tab dialog box Typically to open this box double click a vector disp
263. s 156 LY Tools Available in a Map Document cccceccessecessscceeesseeceesseccesssceeeesseeesessueeeesaees 156 LY Adding an Object to a Collection from a Map Document cccccecesseceeesseeeeeeeees 157 LY Showing Hiding a Collection on a Map Document cccccccssccccesseeceesseeeeesseeeessaees 161 LY Selecting an Object in a Dense Area cceccccccccsssceeesssecceseeceesssecesssseecessseeceesseesessaes 161 LY Adding a New Layer to a Map Document ccccccesseccesseeceessseeeesseeceesseeeeesseeeessaees 163 Q Deleting an object in a collection from a map document eecceecteeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeees 168 LY Default Map Document cccccesccessscceecssseccesseccessseecessseccesseeeccsaeecessseeceesseeeessaes 168 Weorkino ma Table Doe ier ce ccencece ceacrecateateeeeeneanetecve ras ncatdadeueantmmtenerdance ace 169 LI Creating a Table Document in an Open Project cccccccssscceesssceessseeceesseeeeessaeeeessaes 169 LY Removing an Attribute from a Table Document ccceccccsscceessecceesseeeeessseeeessaes 172 D Setting a Filter on an Attribute cess scisscesadacucnasanitiastiesouaen dentsvsasecasesabacaehesascnsauessnins ie toasaetes 173 Q Sorting Objects in a Table Document cccccccccccccssseccesseeceessseceeseeecessseeceetseeeessaes 174 Working in a Time DoOCumMent ccc cccccccccccccessecsssessnseeeeeeeeceesseeessesssneseeeeeeeeeees 175 LY Creating a Time Document in an Open Project
264. s are target coordinates expressed in the local system they are kept unchanged when you change the projects system for example when you run a calibration to make the projects system your local system k All these points can be represented on a map document in many forms depend ing on the legend you define You must be aware however that choosing represen tations that would depart too much from the icons presented above may be confusing when reading the results shown on the map document LI Change Into Function This function is used to transform the type of a point For example you can change a target point into a reference point for further use in the calibration phase To use this function Select one or more points on the active map document On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Change Into In the dialog box that opens the following options are available Chanos mo Change Selected Points INTO Control Point Control Point m 4 Logged Paint Me Target Point Intermediate Point Choose the desired option and then click OK 130 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project LJ Grouping Points This function allows you to create a line or an area from a series of points selected on a map document Select several points on the active map document On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Group Points The Group Points dialog box opens Group Selected Points
265. s in the figure below and then fix this point vertically to transform it into a fixed 1D control point select Ver in the Fixed cell Control Points x uF 3886 121 54 03 53557 0 000 37 27 19 40323 N_ 0 000 0 850 0 000 Hor amp ver x Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network Inthe row underneath click in the Name cell and select MISS as the third control point Click inside the next cell or press the Tab key This causes the other cells in this row to show all the properties of the newly chosen control point as deduced from one of the data files you want to import This control point should not be fixed as it is only for control Enter its true coordinates see values in figure below and select Blank in the Fixed cell On the other hand you need to select Hor amp Ver in the Control cell to inform GNSS Studio that this point will be used as a 3D control point a D w 95r Err Lat 95 Err Elips height 95 err Controi Fixed m PALO 122 09 59 81800 0 000 37 26 39 59600 N 0 000 2 334 0 000 Hor amp ver Hor E J886 1 21 54 03 53557 0 000 37 27 19 40323 N 0 000 0 850 0 000 Hor amp ver Ver MISS 1 21 59 11 90700 0 000 37 23 20 041 00 N 0 000 15 300 0 000 Hor amp ver x Click on the OK button and select To Import Process and Adjust Cancel
266. s to translate single or multiple RINEX formatted data files from any receiver to Ashtech formatted files and alternatively convert Ashtech data files to RINEX format RINEX Con verter supports RINEX format version 2 01 Preliminary Operations Before you perform any conversions you must create four directories and do the following preliminary operations in your computer to avoid confusion Rinexin Create this directory and load your RINEX files into it Rinexout Create this directory Later you will put your converted Rinex Ashtech files in this directory Ashin Create this directory and load your Ashtech files into it Ashout Create this directory Later you will put your converted Ash tech Rinex files in this directory The directory names listed above are suggestions you can use whatever di rectory names you prefer 261 RINEX Converter Starting RINEX Converter Starting RINEX Converter Select the RINEX Converter application in the Thales Navigation folder in the Programs menu from the Start Bar or Select RINEX Converter from the GNSS Studio Tools menu The RINEX to Ashtech dialog box opens see figure below Rinex Converter Mei E3 Rines to Ashtech Ashtech to Rinex Rines File types Rinex Obs files O x Wb Inout dir D ASHSOL PROJECTSS Output dir D ASHSOLS PROJECTS FFS Use Create e D Overwrite files GPS m Bile W
267. s until the entire globe can be seen on the screen LI Selecting a point Once the globe is large enough to make a visual estimate of the desired ob servation point on the globe s surface do the following Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the globe Right click on the mouse and choose Draw The mouse pointer now looks like this Position the mouse pointer very accurately on the desired point then click on the left mouse button to define this point 209 Mission Planning Utility World Map editor The Lat amp Long fields in the dialog box are then updated to reflect the exact coordinates of the point you have just selected Note that the Alt field is left unchanged This parameter should be defined manually by typing its value directly in the field On the globe the selected point is shown as a red dot whose size is inde pendent of the zoom setting LI Globe Viewing Options Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the globe Right click on the mouse and choose Options A dialog box opens in which you can change the globe viewing options The defaults for these options are the following Display I Coast lines I Country boundaries State boundaries M Islands IY Lakes IY Rivers M Grid Cancel Resolution Low resolution A The available 4 resolutions are low medium high very high The higher the resolution the more accurate the details on the glo
268. se of flattening Item A set of visual elements representing any object from a collection on a map document Typically an item is made up of an icon and a label assigned to the icon Layer 1 A set of parameters defining the graphical representation on a map document of any object from a given collection 2 A name given to geo graphical objects of the same family e g trees fire hydrants etc Legend The set of layers making up the content of a map document Each layer defines the representation on the map document of any object from a given collection Object A unit of information from a collection Point Control Surveyed point whose accurate position is already known This known position can be set as a fixed input to the processing or simply used as comparison material to assess the quality of the survey Point Control Floating Control point whose know coordinates are only used to assess the quality of a survey 347 GNSS Studio User Manual Glossary Point Control Fixed Control point whose know coordinates are used as an input to the processing The surveyed coordinates for this point are replaced with the known coordinates This action is called fixing the control point Point Intermediate Logged point of lesser interest e g a point in a trajec tory Point Logged Point surveyed in the field in real time or post processing mode Point Reference A point materialized in the field whose theoreti
269. ssscceessceeeessseccssseeceesseeecesseeceetseeeeeseeeeenas 283 Q Advanced options ses eessesseesssessseessseresssesssresseessserrsssresseressnerssseresssressrressneesseresss 284 Chapter 11 Internet Download ccccccccssssssssssssssssesscccccssssseessssssees 285 TT EVM C0 OU E EE SANE E A A EE EE A AES 285 Using Internet Download ccccccccccccccccessssssscceeeeeeeceecceseseseaaeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeegas 287 Adding new Providers to the Existing List of Providers ccceeesssseeeeeeees 290 Chapter 12 Appendices vivewsssttesisdssivesccnanssteveanieceivaratarsenstestaisutvedsenieceviesteises 293 Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter ccccccccssssssseceeececeeceeeesesessssseeeeeeees 293 Eh RealTime Survey Tutorial cssccsiousareneruanevnseerneieemataeenaiommas 293 LY Stop amp Go Survey Tutorial 2 vssssicscspatccicycverssasevstcasiesansetataavsereuswsiisscennveysierderavinncsees 295 EC Static Survey Tutorial 73 sacicucssissecesassevasnantoveascsosnanenedw sxeeaansiecasiasnatsore dsigeinssexasciosaenes 302 vi GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Network Ai US CN CI0 ssia EE 308 LY Minimally Constrained Adjustment cccccccccsscccssscceessseecessseccessseeeecsseeeeessaeeesaees 309 ED Constrained A Gis iii xc cacssuiaeaacitsuasacne dyvnuineeasesdagandsasasaupearsesannsastiateieaneysveneeriaawortinnes 313 Blunder Detection Tools ccccccecccscccccccecececesessesssnneeeeeeeeeee
270. st this is a good indicator that the observa tion does not contain blunders If the residual fails the Tau test the observation should be closely exam ined to determine if it contains a blunder Remember that if a residual fails the Tau test this is not a certain indica tor that a blunder exists Simply removing observations that have failed the Tau test is not recommended These observations must be examined carefully to determine if a blunder exists Q Loop Closure Analysis See Checking Loop Closure on page 120 324 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools LI Repeat Vector Analysis When performing a GPS survey it is recommended that a certain percentage of observed vectors be repeated i e observed more than once These repeat vectors can be used to analyze the repeatability of the observations giving a clue to the overall quality of the final survey In addition repeat observations can be useful in identifying blunders if a problem arises with one of the re peated observations gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN GNSS Studio automatically performs an analysis of all repeat vectors in the network All repeat vectors are compared to each other and differences in the observations are presented for analysis In addition the resulting differences between repeat observations are compared to the user defined accuracy spec ification e Ifthe difference between the repeat observations of a vector is smal
271. survey project open in GNSS Studio use the Download Raw Data from External Device command from the Project menu This will open the Download window from which you will be able to download data 243 7 Download Utility Data Files Data Files During a data recording session all the data for that session is stored on the SD card as a U file The U file is a compressed file that contains the data that is converted to individual files during the download process These files in clude the raw data file B file that stores all carrier and code phase data the ephemeris file E file that stores satellite position and timing information the site position information file C file the session information file S file the satellite almanach data file ALM file the ionospheric data file ION file and the epoch solution amp vector solution information file T file The B E S and ALM files are standard files that are recorded during data col lection If the receiver is an RTK rover the receiver creates and stores a spe cific file of the T file type containing CBEN records RTK epoch solutions and OBEN records RTK vector solutions Lastly the receiver creates an event file D file if the receiver is collecting attribute or event driven data The table below summarizes the file types including file names a descrip tion of the information contained in the files and the file format File Type
272. t Fixed Float or Partial Enabled box If checked the vector will be involved in the adjustment Adjusted check box Software set Indicates whether the displayed vector solution has been adjusted checked or not cleared If the box is checked then the lower part of the dialog box also shows the Adjustment Results as well as the resulting Residuals If it is clear then only Process Results are provided in the lower part of the dialog box Residuals button Provides access to a full screen diagram showing the Carrier Phase Doubled Difference Residuals versus Time This informa tion can be plotted for each satellite or for all satellites in view during the observation by clicking the corresponding tab in the lower part of the window Note the presence of two vertical dot amp dash lines showing the limits of the concerned static occupation 7 O oO O O O 143 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project You can zoom in on a particular area by dragging a rectangle around this 144 area then press the Esc key to zoom out Setting the viewing options for this diagram is achieved by right clicking anywhere on the diagram and making the desired choices on the menu that pops up see menu in figure below Carrier Phase Double Differenced Residuals L1 L2 0 35 0 2 i wll a i Dn a mr OMe 0 05 ails w Reference Sw may hase SE ee A e e a a 3 hts jm ae w Grid
273. t Cancel button Click this button to cancel all the changes you have made to the box since you opened it Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor LI Moving re shaping or deleting a curtain Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the graph and click with the right mouse button Inthe shortcut menu that pops up choose the Select command Select the curtain by clicking the mouse pointer inside the drawing object a selected curtain displays handles then Drag this object to move the curtain Or drag each of its handles successively to re shape it Or press the Del key to delete it az i 5 m e va UoISSIN 215 Mission Planning Utility Curtain editor 216 WinComm Utility Introduction Chapter 5 WinComm Utility Introduction WinComm allows you to communicate with GPS receivers by offering the fol lowing functions Automatic search for baud rate to be used on operator s request only with Thales Navigation receivers Identification of the connected GPS receiver on operator s request only with Thales Navigation receivers Viewing the data stream on the serial port Sending commands to the GPS receiver Manual request for recording data from the GPS receiver Programmable requests for recording data from the GPS receiver WinComm main window _ GNSS Terminal Com 1 9600 8 No 1 Command 6500 Mode Send Simple GPS Recorder EE C Par
274. t ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN 1 On the Commands tab click on the Adjustment topic bar and then on the Define Control Points icon 2 Change the fixed status for each control point You can have points which are horizontal control only points that are vertical control only and points which are both 4 Press the F7 key to perform the adjustment again You should see text in the Output pane similar to the following Adjustment type Over constrained Control stations Constraints 0002 Latitude Longitude Elevation _ASH Latitude Longitude Elevation All the tasks described in this Network Adjustment section are summarized in the figure below 313 1 2 Appendices Network Adjustment Minimally Constrained Adjustment Uncertainties are too pes simistic Scale them down Much less than 1 Rerun adjustment Variance of unit weight Much greater than 1 Chi square test Uncertainties are too optimistic Scale them up Rerun adjust No residuals flagged Should have a blunder free adjustment ment Some residuals Data set probably contains one or more blunders Iso late and resolve remove blunders Use loop closure large analysis and repeat vector analysis to assist if needed Rerun adjustment Adjustment completed Uncertainties present estimated accuracy of adjusted points m
275. t This document is scrolled down in the View pane as it is being created Once GNSS Studio has finished creating the report a new tab Land Survey tab appears in the View pane The report is saved as an RTF file named Land Survey Overview and is appended to the list of existing documents attached to the project see below the new content of the Documents tab in the Work space pane vse E Design view vse SE Survey View a L Workbook A Time View 30 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 11 Creating a Background Map Project Inthe Workspace pane click on the Commands tab then on the Project topic bar and then on the Create New Project icon In the dialog box that opens make the following choices highlight Back ground Maps Project enter the project name Tuto_1BckGrnd and check Add to current workspace See figure below Documents Projects Workspaces r mo amp Land Survey Project Project name Fl Background Maps Project fT uto_1BckGrnd LA C Create new workspace preesesoesscoseeseecoesooeseseesososesesosesescesssseesseeeeog r AEAEE a V Use default settings Modify Default Settings Click on the Modify Default Settings button A new dialog box appears in which you have to select a coordinate system Select the system the maps to be imported are based on here FRANCE NTF Lambert zone II If this system is not available in the combo box of th
276. t 11 Peters Pile Et vee Man Proet Tools Window Help olp mg teja Bwn cme EEA EAE PTO ecaericued Hoey Dats Proms Fleer F3 ipon ay Coats doom Fikes Fa Name of the coordi nate system chosen forthe project is re ns called here ly Pim Piim rdir 0 orenbe ae he Bui ha he Desicad Popon bom E eral Dace L z i z apiking File Oi iQualiteBralustion Gs feudis VIED GWU Studia 1 l i aplesi RealTime POINTS it UK 15 pintis imported Rapaosia lt lt afinive z Ready Commands tab Documents tab Collections tab 16 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Currently the View pane shows a map of the data points you have just imported Note that the displayed coordinates are in compliance with your choice of spatial reference system and the grid coordinates map scale have been updated to match the locations of these points When several documents are open in a project you choose the one you want to display in the View pane by simply clicking on the corresponding tab located at the bottom of the View pane These tabs will be visible only if the View gt As Worbook option is checked it is by default Using the button in the upper right edge of one of these documents you can also dock this document to make it always visible By default the Workbook tbl document is docked in the low
277. t Vertical Unit Horizontal Unit H local Hi Offset Offset dH GI L84 LO Gg G84 GO eo Enter the following parameters to complete the definition of the new pro jected system 7 O oO O Projected system name Labels associated with the three coordinates Orientation of the three axes Unit used for horizontal coordinates meters US feet or Interna tional feet For your information the Meters per unit field indicates the value in meters of the selected unit e g 1 Int foot 0 3048 m Vertical datum the Ellipsoid option refers to the ellipsoid you have selected earlier for the datum Unit used for vertical coordinates Meters per unit field same as above The check box located bottom left allows you to define the same unit for ALL coordinates when checked Vertical correction check the corresponding box if the local system includes a vertical correction and then enter the parameters defining this correction 87 Reference Coordinate Systems Click OK to create the new system and close the dialog box The new sys tem then becomes the one selected in the Spatial Reference System field LI Creating a Geographic System Follow the same procedure as when you create a projected system The only difference is that you do not have to define a projection LI Creating a Geocentric System Geocentric systems are incompatible with maps and so in GNSS Studio can
278. t be operated as a stationary unit at a known fixed point it is then called the sta tion base or base station the other one is moved around within the sur veyed site and is called the rover Stop 2 s9 7 oo 3 p Trajectory l l XK Stop 1 a mm 4 295 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter The surveyed site forms a trajectory that may include specific occupation times on particular points Stop amp Go mode Data collecting is then per formed while the receiver is moved along a trajectory and also while it is mo mentarily stopped on a point This type of survey therefore produces a dynamic or kinematic observation file 2 Internal Processing Tied to Raw Data Import Project gt Import Raw Data from Files on Disk command When importing a raw data file observation file into the active project after the user has provided a File name a Point name and has specified that the file results from dynamic logging the following takes place in GNSS Studio An approximate position let s call it P0 is determined in straight GPS mode A new object is added to the project database in the Files collection This object provides a full description of the imported file and also includes the name of the associated point name provided by the user at the begin ning of the import operation the approximate PO position computed in the previous step
279. t to the Tutorials Chapter After selecting the Static mode the following processing steps are run in GNSS Studio The ultimate result is stored in the Points collection in the object corre sponding to the surveyed site unless this site is held fixed The vector resulting from the above processing 1s built It is oriented from the reference to the computed point A new object is created in the Vectors collection showing how the vector is built The vector is identified by the two points from which it proceeds and therefore has no proper name k At the beginning of the procedure you can specify a point name different from that of the surveyed site and associate the file available for this site with this dif ferent point name As a result the ultimate solution will automatically be saved as a new object in the Points collection This way of working allows you to save several solutions for the same surveyed site In this case however it is the users responsibility to use appropriate naming so that he she does not get lost amid all the solutions available 4 Adjustment Processing Project gt Adjust Network command There are two main reasons why an adjustment step should be run You want the points you have just surveyed to be expressed in relation to a reference point that has accurately been determined beforehand This reference point must also be one of the points that have been surveyed in the field If that is the case
280. takes place within a single dialog box that you can access by following the procedure below after opening a project in GNSS Studio On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Project gt Import Positions From Files on Disk or Project gt Export Positions to Files on Disk In the left hand area of the dialog box that opens select Points or Vectors depending on the type of object for which you want to create a custom format Click on to create a new format or A to make changes to an exist ing custom format after selecting its name in the right hand list The dia log box that opens allows you to define a new format or to modify the existing custom format 7 O oO O O O 151 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project This dialog box 1s divided into 5 main areas as shown in the figure on the next page Area allowing you to name the file that will contain the created custom format 1 Area allowing you to choose the parameters that can be inserted into the custom format insert buttons Header Body selection buttons 2 Area for editing the header of the custom format 3 Area for editing the body of the custom format 4 Area providing instructions on how to use this dialog box 5 Dialog box allowing you to create a custom format Custom Format Points EG Name In the Field Selection Double click to insert a field 5 Press Ctrl and double click to edit t
281. ted by the following message in the Output pane Exporting File D My Projects Tuto_3 0vrectors bin OE LO wectorls exported 73 Tutorials Tutorial 3 Static Survey Geodetic Network LI Step 6 Creating a Report Press the F9 key or in the Workspace pane click on the Export topic bar and then on the Land Survey Report icon Inthe Land Survey Report dialog box that opens select Land Survey Overview Land Survey Report X Select the kind of report you want to create Land Survey Overview Cancel Click OK This opens a new dialog box in which you can choose the items you wish to include in the report clear those you do not want Click OK GNSS Studio then starts creating the report document This document displays in the View pane as it is being created Once GNSS Studio has finished creating the report a Land Survey tab appears in the View pane The report document is appended as an RTF file to the list of existing documents attached to the project see on Documents tab LI Step 7 Closing the project Select File gt Close Workspace This saves and closes the project contained in the workspace and the workspace as well End of Tutorial 3 See Static Survey Tutorial 3 on page 302 for more explanations on this type of survey 74 Reference Introduction Chapter 3 Reference Introduction LI Starting GNSS Studio Inthe Windows task bar click on Start and select Progra
282. tered as a GNSS Studio user write down your personal code displayed in third line in dialog box above and then click on the web link If your PC is equipped with a connection to the Internet you will be able to access our web site to make your request From the personal code you will send us we will be able to generate a password for you Once you get it type in this password in the lower edit box see dialog box above and then click OK This unlocks the software option making it available for use 6 Introduction to GNSS Studio Installation LI Using a license File Rather Than a Dongle For those of you who prefer not to use a dongle and have their options en abled from a license file do the following the first time you run GNSS Stu dio On the GNSS Studio menu bar select Help gt About GNSS Studio Inthe About GNSS Studio dialog box that opens click on the button on the right A new dialog box opens which should look like this in the absence of a dongle on the parallel or USB port Unlock Software Option E awa N Sy ou r m e Using hardware protection method dongle four personal cade is S830807 Please contact THALES Navigation to register and get the password for the software option you want to unlock Www thalesnayigation com Then type this password in the edit box below and press OF when ready _ e cence _ To get the password needed to run th
283. terrupted error free or virus free Purchaser assumes the entire risk of using the software 2 PURCHASER S REMEDY PURCHASER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WAR RANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AT THALES NAVIGATION S OPTION OF ANY DEFECTIVE PART OF THE RECEIVER OR ACCESSORIES WHICH ARE COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY REPAIRS UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL ONLY BE MADE AT AN AUTHO RIZED THALES NAVIGATION SERVICE CENTER ANY REPAIRS BY A SERVICE CENTER NOT AUTHORIZED BY THALES NAVIGATION WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY 3 PURCHASER S DUTIES To obtain service contact and return the product with a copy of the original sales receipt to the dealer from whom you purchased the product Thales Navigation reserves the right to refuse to provide service free of charge if the sales receipt is not provided or if the information contained in it is incomplete or illegible or if the serial number is altered or removed Thales Navigation will not be responsible for any losses or damage to the product incurred while the product is in transit or is being shipped for repair Insurance is recommended Thales Navigation suggests using a trackable shipping method such as UPS or FedEx when returning a product for service 4 LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ITEM 1 ABOVE ALL OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THOSE OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED
284. th respect to the quality of performance of the goods and any and all warranties and representations THIS WARRANTY SETS FORTH ALL OF THALES NAVIGATION S RESPONSIBILITIES REGARDING THIS PRODUCT THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM LOCALITY TO LOCALITY including Directive 1999 44 EC in the EC Member States AND CERTAIN LIMITATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 CHOICE OF LAW This limited warranty is governed by the laws of France without reference to its conflict of law provisions or the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and shall benefit Thales Navigation its succes sors and assigns THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT AFFECT THE CUSTOMER S STATUTORY RIGHTS UNDER APPLICABLE LAWS IN FORCE IN THEIR LOCALITY NOR THE CUSTOMER S RIGHTS AGAINST THE DEALER ARISING FROM THEIR SALES PURCHASE CONTRACT such as the guarantees in France for latent defects in accordance with Article 1641 et seq of the French Civil Code For further information concerning this limited warranty please call or write Thales Navigation SA ZAC La Fleuriaye BP 433 44474 Carquefou Cedex France Phone 33 0 2 28 09 38 00 Fax 33 0 2 28 09 39 39 GNSS Studio User Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to GNSS Studio essessecoecoossssssssseccoecossssssseseeesose L IP eS NO aie ce Soden E cues E A i G Wi ONS S SIMOTE aiiai ENA N E AEE E
285. the Export topic bar and then on the Export Positions to File icon In the dialog box that appears make the following two choices Export Positions to Files TOS Coordinate File CAS CARLSON Coordinate File CAD Thales 77 4 In Cancel Click OK A new dialog box appears asking you to name the export file Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Choose the project folder where to store the export file and enter Tar getPts as the file name Save int Cj Tuto_t d E ee Ek 3 m e pa AN save as lype Thales xz out txt Cancel E Click Save A Data export message appears briefly The end of data export is denoted by the following message in the Output pane Exporting File Ci My Frojects Tuto_l Targetfts tat DE l point s exported 29 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey LI Step 10 Generating a Report Press the F9 key or in the Workspace pane click on the Export topic bar from the Commands tab and then select the Land Survey Report icon Inthe Land Survey Report dialog box that opens select Land Survey Over view Land Survey Report X Select the kind of report you want to create Land Survey Overview Cancel Click OK This opens a new dialog box in which you can choose the items you wish to include in the report clear those you do not want Click OK GNSS Studio then starts creating the report documen
286. the asso ciated scrollbar to browse through the list of available commands Label Used to enter and or view a plain label for each command script Use the associated scrollbar to browse through the list of available com mands Add command Adds the command viewed in the text box to the list of available commands Delete command Removes the command viewed in the text box from the list of available commands Load commands Opens a dialog box that allows you to choose the appro priate command group file for the connected receiver The command group becomes available in the main window after you close the Com mands Editor dialog box Save commands Opens a dialog box that allows you to save your own command group as viewed in the Commands Editor dialog box WinComm Utility Simple GPS recorder Simple GPS recorder All data output from the receiver s port is viewed in the main window s Dis play pane window The data can be recorded to the file specified in the File Name and Directory text boxes When the Simple GPS Recorder option is activated you start and stop the re cording manually by simply clicking the Start Stop Recording button Simple Gps Recorder VS Editing 5 Director c program fles gnes studiotra Bl File Marne Record any File Max Size No Limits Start Recording File Name Used to specify the name of the file to which you wish to record the data from the receiver Unless a maximum si
287. the exact val ues in the figure below and then fix this point horizontally and vertically to transform this point into a 3D control point select Hor amp Ver in the Fixed cell Control Points xX oeer Control Fixed 0001 37 13 24 52200 E 0 000 56 01 39 96000 N 0 000 271 920 0 000 Hor amp Ver or amp Ver T Click on the OK button and then select To Import and Process Baselines Cancel To Import and Process Single Sites To Import and Process Baselines To Import Process and Adjust This enables GNSS Studio to import the files and then automatically pro cess the baseline between the two points At the end of the processing phase GNSS Studio shows the results of the processing These results are detailed in the next step Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing LI Step 3 Analyzing the Results On the map OF 3 m e pa m AN 56 01 37 50000 N 13 22 00000 E The vectors determined by GNSS Studio are shown as green red seg ments depending on whether they respectively passed or failed the QA test here they are all green The size and shape of the error ellipse as well as the vertical error a vertical segment for each vector are repre sented at mid distance along the vector Please refer to the legend shown in the lower right on the map to assess the error ellipse and the vertical error attached to each vector The loca
288. ting File C My Projects Tuto_e yexportl txt OE 6 point s exported LI Step 6 Creating a Report Press the F9 key or in the Workspace pane click on the Export topic bar and then on the Land Survey Report icon Inthe Land Survey Report dialog box that opens select Land Survey Overview Land Survey Report i X Select the kind of report you want to create Land Survey Overview Cancel Click OK This opens a new dialog box in which you can choose the items you wish to include in the report clear those you do not want Click OK GNSS Studio then starts creating the report document This document is scrolled down in the View pane as it is created Once GNSS Studio has finished creating the report a Land Survey tab appears in the View pane 58 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing The report document is appended as an RTF file to the list of existing documents attached to the project as shown after clicking on the Docu ments tab in the Workspace pane Workspace Tuto 2 1 project s Tuto_ documents 2 ven Mi Design view HE 488 Survey View ol E workbook LTEN Time Wiem D m e pals DR LI Step 7 Closing the project Select File gt Close Workspace This saves and closes the project contained in the workspace and the workspace as well End of Tutorial 2 See Stop amp Go Survey Tutorial 2 on page 295 for more explanations
289. tion is not made the SurvCom window will open anyway but the program will only be able to display the list on the left showing files and di rectories from the PC Click the Options button and adjust the COM port and or baud rate settings to match those of the data collector and press the Connect button to try again 254 SurvCom Utility SurvCom Main Window SurvCom Main Window The SurvCom window looks like this after a connection to an external device is made correctly SuryCom Local PC Total Files 13 Bytes 3984K Bytes Free 238M a AFINI 12408 a AFS32V10 DLL 126K DBMO25 DLL 471K deallect ini 422 DMM EXE 452K GEOCOM22 DLL 194K IDEX015 DLL 449K MFCXO002 DLL 650K Pi process ini 213 File Status Connected to remote machine Set Path Transfer Local Path C Program files Carlson x port Tagged LOCAL Files 0 Make Dir Remote Total Files 17 Bytes 50883 Bytes Free 152026 Remote Path Disk Data 06 26 02 13 2 Up One Level 06 17 02 11 06 26 02 13 Backup 06 17 02 11 05 01 00 15 cut CRD 236 06 21 02 20 03 18 00 14 cut int 578 06 23 02 14 02 18 00 19 5 cut NOT 50 06 21 02 20 06 26 02 20 cut RW 5 433 06 21 02 20 04 09 00 12 demo CL 260 11 02 97 15 02 18 00 18 demo GRD 38542 11 10 97 09 02 18 00 18 demo PRO 120 11 02 97 15 02 18 00 18 5 derna sct 1920 09 26 97 09 demo TPL 09 26 97 09 15
290. tion of the control point is represented by a dark blue triangle The name of this point is displayed next to it The letters H and V by the triangle icon indicate that the control point has been fixed horizon tally and vertically The location of each point where static occupation took place is repre sented by a flag on top of an upright stick The name of the point is dis played next to it 51 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing 2 Each imported file is represented by a diskette icon The name of the file is displayed in gray characters next to the diskette icon Each of these icons is positioned on the map based on the straight GPS solution GNSS Studio determines from the corresponding data file The baseline from which all vectors proceed is represented by a red dot ted line connecting the two diskette icons You need to zoom in to see this line In the Workbook table Click on the Points tab and resize the window if necessary This table looks like this Workbook tbl Tuto_2 WGS 84 Meters Name Description Long 1e emps height Constraints SE LSE _ ESS E ELS ELSES _ ELST 1 BKINMA96 123456789012345678 37 13 24 02500 E 56 01 38 76807 N 261 934 Estimated No constraints 2 ooo 37 13 24 52200 E 56 01 39 96000 N 271 920 Estimated Horizontal amp Vertical Fixed 3 KINM 37 13 23 91891 E 5
291. tion on the World model Map editor Uploading a Geoid Model into a System Open the desired geoid model in Geoids Select Transfer gt Write A dialog box appears asking you to specify the type of system attached to the PC and possibly to extract geoid data from the open geoid model Extract region from RAF98 geoid Zmar data collector iamas data collector OSNP Receiver Korth 51 30 0 0000 H South 42 0 0 0000 N wiest o 30 00000 East 30 0 0000 E Approximate file size 1 41 Mo Ww orld Map Cancel 238 Geoids Utility Uploading a Geoid Model into a System Choose the option corresponding to the system you are using If you are using a Z Max select Z Max data collector If you are using a system from the 6000 or 6500 series select DSNP Receiver Then if necessary extract the data from the open geoid model that matches the geographical area you are working in Use the World Map button as explained on the previ ous page to define this area For your information the amount of data resulting from the extraction is displayed in the dialog box Click OK to upload the geoid data to the system Depending on which system you are using the following then occurs e Ifyou are using a Z Max system the following dialog box opens Data Transfer 4 E X Connect pour held terminal to your PC On your field terminal launch the Data Transfer utility Then press OF when ready
292. to set up a group of commands interpretable by the connected receiver The commands you select in this dialog box will be prompted in the main win dow As aresult you will only need to choose the desired command from the list in the main window and click to send the command to the receiver After you install WinComm a number of default command groups are avail able on your computer Each command group is contained in a file whose name is the Group Label see this parameter in the next page with cmd as ex tension The buttons in the Commands Editor dialog box allow you to load any com mand group file available make any change to the group and save your own command groups The selected command group will be available in the main window after you close the Commands Editor dialog box by clicking in the upper right corner Commands Editor E3 Group Label 5o00 Click here to close the Com mands Editor dialog box This loads the selected command group to the main window 1239 Command PDAS DE LSES a Label Cancel a session Add Command Delete Command Load Commands Save Commands Group Label Used to enter and or view the name given to a command group For example this name can suggest the type of receiver connected when this command group should be used 225 A WinComm Utility 226 Sending a Command to the GPS receiver Command Used to enter and or view each command script Use
293. to fail GNSS Studio automatically compensates for observation uncertainties being too large or too small therefore the passing or failure of the Chi Square test has no true bearing on the quality of the adjustment gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN If by using the other blunder detection tools available you are confident that all blunders have been removed from the adjustment and you are happy with the relative size of the observation residuals then a failure of the Chi Square test should not be a concern The Chi Square test can be made to pass if de sired by scaling the observation uncertainties using the Confidence scaling fac tor found in the Miscellaneous tab of the Project Settings dialog Scale the vector uncertainties by the computed Standard Error of Unit Weight Q Observation Residuals In a least squares adjustment small corrections are applied to the observa tions to obtain the best fit of all observations producing one solution for all points The best fit is the solution that produces the least amount of correc tions to the observations These small corrections are termed residuals Each observation will have one or more residuals GPS observations have three re siduals one for each component of the GPS vector X Y Z The reason why observations have to be corrected at all in order to produce a good fit is due to errors in the observations If observations contained no errors then an adjustment wo
294. to the Obs tab and click Nav to 276 switch to the Nav tab see figure below ki You can enter information for all three tabs and save all the data using the Save button The best practice however is to save the data using the Apply but ton for each tab immediately after entering the data in case of a computer or power failure k The Save button saves the data entered on the active tab only and closes the Additional info for Selected Files dialog box Additional info for selected files x Obs Nav Met Agency Creating Current File l Comments RINEX Converter Converting Ashtech Files to RINEX Format 13 Complete the fields in the Nav dialog box The information entered in the Nav dialog box is stored in the navigation data file The table below describes each field Description Agency Creating Current File Name of the company or agency who converted the data to RINEX Comments Any comments pertaining to the station data quality cover GPS GLONASS etc 50 characters maximum 14 Click Apply to save the changes made to the Nav dialog box and click on the Met tab to switch to this tab Additional info for selected files Obs Navy Met Station Name Agency Creating Current File Comments Date Y M D Time UTC Pressurefmbs Dry Temp Rel Hum 2ZWET mm Vora 1010 0 2002 10 7 CSSS N 50 0 211 RINEX Converter Converting Asht
295. trl_Easting_ 123 Ctrl_Horz_Error 23 Ctr_Total_Error X Ctr_GA Rl Surv_Time 123 Surv_Easting 23 Sury_Northing Surv_Latitude 13 Surv_Ellips_H 123 Surv_Easting 123 Sury_Height_ 123 Surv_Easting 3 Sury_Horz_C 123 Surv_Height_ 23 Surv_EN_Corr 123 Sury_EH_Corr 3 Survy_NH_Corr Convergence 123 Scale_Factor 3 PIP 123 P2P 123 Side X warming Phe Message 123 Ctr_Ellips_Hei 123 Ctrl_Ortho_He 123 Ctrl_Easting Sd 123 Ctrl_Northing_ 723 Ctrl_Northing_ 123 Ctrl_Northing_ 123 CtrlHeight_Er Surv_Longitude 123 Surv_Ortho_H 23 Surv_Northing 723 Surv_Northing 123 Elevation_Fac Point name Point type Feature code Layer name Free notes Control type Survey status Coordinate constraints Use in calibration Control easting Control northing Control latitude Control longitude Control ellipsoid height Control orthometric height Control easting standard deviation Control northing standard deviation Control height standard deviation Control easting confidence 95 Control northing confidence 95 Control horizontal confidence 95 Control height confidence 95 Control easting error Control northing error Control horizontal error Control height error Control error according to control type Control quality assurance test passed Surveyed position time Surveyed easting Surveyed northing Surveyed latitude Surveyed longitude
296. ts tab as one of the Tuto_1 documents Making the Vector Layer Visible on the Map Document In the Workspace pane click on the Collections tab In this tab click on the DEPARTMT_region collection Drag amp drop this collection on the map document release the mouse but ton once the cursor is changed to a framed symbol This causes the Layer Wizard Data dialog box to appear asking you to create a filter to be applied to this collection 3 m e pa p AN Layer Wizard Data x 4 Back Cancel 39 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click i in the right upper part of this dialog box and make the follow ing choices in the dialog box that opens Attribute and filter x Attribute Ate CODE Filter equals g And Or Click OK to close this window This takes you back to the Layer Wizard Data dialog box in which the filter you have just defined is now displayed In this Layer Wizard Data dialog box enter an alias for the layer For exam ple type 44 in the Alias field Then click on the Next gt button The Layer Wizard Style dialog box now opens Make the following choices in this box Layer Wizard Style 0 M Layer Wizard Style 0 M Style Text MV Line a E Fil Normal Selected coca 40 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click the Finish button You should now obtain the following informatio
297. ts will be 3D points hori zontal coordinates vertical coordinate Polyline is 3D NO means that all the surveyed points will be 2D points hori zontal coordinates only Polyline is 3D ARLIGAR GIGA Below is an example of a feature code defined as explained above Hew Feature Code x Code Layer T15 Tess Full Text Variety code 15 sequoia Polvline On Polvline is 3D NO No Caneel Click OK to create the new feature code and close the dialog box 101 3 Reference Working in a Land Survey Project Q Uploading a Real Time Job The diagram below summarizes the different steps through which GNSS Stu dio can provide a Z Max 6500 or 6000 surveying device with a job Z max 6500 6000 Switch on data collector Connect Husky to Insert PC Card for Launch FAST Survey PC via serial cable 6000 in office PC On Husky run drive Hcom by typing h Select Project gt Upload Positions to External Device Select device in which to upload the job Z Max data collector and Data Transfer Utility 6500 data collect 6000 PC Card Click OK Click OK Click OK Choose Automatic or Specify PC port involved Specify path to PC Card drive Manual Transfer Click OK Click OK Click OK Name the job Choose amp sort the reference amp target points that must be part of the job Click OK Click OK Click OK Y Job Upload in p
298. tton to open the Switch Data Source dia log and connect to another receiver Switch Pane button Click this button to change the active pane Session Info button Click this button to Open the Session Information dialog and set session parameters for the data file Select Files button Click this button to select files based on a file mask The Select Files dialog opens to enter a file mask for file selection Copy To button Click this button to copy the selected file s to the current directory on the PC Move To button Click this button to move the selected file s to the current directory on the PC Delete button Click this button to delete the selected file s Create New Directory button Click this button to create a new directory in the cur rent PC directory Free Space button Click this button to check the available disk space for the current drive or receiver Brief File Info button Click this button to display only the names of the files Detailed File Info button Click this button to display the name size date and time of last modification for each file and directory in the current directory Help button Click this button to access the help system What s This Help button Click this button and anywhere else in the window or menu system for quick help on the feature 247 J z z pa a 248 Download Uti
299. u will import into this tutorial project A rover was moved from point to point in Stop amp Go mode over this same period of time The raw data collected during this time by the rover has resulted in a single observation file that you will also import into this tutorial project At one step in the post processing you will transform the point where the base station was located as a fixed control point This will allow you to en ter the true coordinates of this point and also to ask GNSS Studio to use these coordinates in the baseline processing instead of those resulting from the pro cessing of the observation file collected at the base station 46 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing LI Step 1 Creating a New Project Inthe Workspace pane click on the Create New Project icon In the New dialog box that opens select the Land Survey Project option on the left In the Project name field type a name for the new project For example type in Tuto 2 nev x Projects Workspaces S Land Survey Project Project name Background Maps Project p o 3 m e pa m AN Create new workspace C Add to current workspace IV Use default settings Modify Default Settings Click on the Modify Default Settings button In the new dialog box that appears select WGS 84 as the spatial reference system to be used in the new project Keep the default sele
300. uld not be needed All observations would fit together perfectly 319 1 2 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools Two types of errors can be found in survey observations random errors and blunders Random errors will cause small corrections to be needed in obser vations in order to make them fit together properly If only random errors ex ist in the data set all residuals will likely be small On the other hand if large blunders exist in the data set large residuals will likely be produced Examining the size of observation residuals can help in identifying blunders in the observations used in the adjustment GNSS Studio will display and output the residuals for all observations These residuals should be examined in an attempt to identify blunders If blunders are identified they must be re moved from the data set and the adjustment rerun If the observation con taining the blunder is a critical observation of the data set it should be examined to determine the cause of the blunder Once repaired the observa tion can be returned to the adjustment If the observation is critical to the strength of the network and cannot be repaired the data will need to be re observed There are two main difficulties in using residuals to identify blunders in a data set 1 Blunders if large enough will produce large residuals for the observa tion containing the blunder But large residuals do not always indicate a blunder in an observatio
301. urred while the product is in transit or is being shipped for repair Insurance is recommended Thales Navigation suggests using a trackable shipping method such as UPS or FedEx when returning a product for service EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ALL OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WAR RANTIES INCLUDING THOSE OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE MERCHANTABILITY OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED AND IF APPLICABLE IMPLIED WARRAN TIES UNDER ARTICLE 35 OF THE UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS Some national state or local laws do not allow limitations on implied warranty or how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation may not apply to you The following are excluded from the warranty coverage 1 periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear 2 batteries and finishes 3 installations or defects resulting from installation 4 any damage caused by i shipping misuse abuse negligence tampering or improper use i1 disasters such as fire flood wind and lightning iii unauthorized attachments or modification 5 service performed or attempted by anyone other than an authorized Thales Navigations Service Center 6 any product components or parts not manufactured by Thales Navigation 7 that the receiver will be free from any claim for infringement of any patent trademark copyright or other proprietary right including tra
302. vations the chances are very good that the observation contains a blunder This process can be complicated even further if multiple blunders exist in the data set But systematic removal and replacement of observations will result in identifying the blunders gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN Throughout this section we have talked about large residuals and their roll in identifying blunders A natural question is What is a large resid ual Unfortunately there is no easy answer to this question For GPS vectors random errors in the observations increase as the length of the vector increases Therefore residuals will increase with baseline length A residual of 0 10 meters on a 20 kilometer line may solely be due to random errors but the same residual on a 2 kilometer line almost surely indicates a blunder So a residual being large or small is dependent on the GPS vector length There are a few guidelines that can be used to help examine residuals 321 12 Appendices Blunder Detection Tools 322 First all vectors of similar length should have similar residuals Second residuals should not be much greater than the measurement accuracy of the equipment For example if the equipment being used is capable of making observations at an accuracy level of 0 01m 2ppm the residuals for an observations should not be much greater than this capability An accuracy specification of 0 01m 2ppm allows for an error
303. vey Come back to GNSS Studio On the Commands tab click on the Import topic bar and then on the Download Positions from External Device icon In the dialog box that opens make the following selections Download Positions from External Device Download Device ATK results Zma data collector 6500 data collector BO00 PC card Click OK The following dialog box opens Clear the Automatic Transfer option Data Transfer E x Connect pour field terminal to your PE On your field terminal launch the Data Transfer utility Then press OF when ready Cancel Click OK The Connecting to remote system message is displayed until communication with the data collector is established Then the SurvCom dialog box opens If no data collector is connected to the PC the Communications Failure message will appear In this case click OK to open the SurvCom dialog box 22 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Real Time Survey Click a to close the SurvCom dialog box The following dialog box now opens From job 3 m e pa m AN Directory CM y Projects Tuto 15job E W Read feature code list file as well Click OK Sometimes the coordinate system used in the field is different from the one defined in the project This is the case for the present tuto rial The following dialog box then appears in which you should choose which coordinate system to use in the project In this exam
304. ware tool for all surveyors who need to be efficiently and smoothly assisted in their GPS surveys GNSS Studio really offers high standards of performance processing speed compactness and user friendliness This software is organized around a powerful database containing all the data created or collected at different stages during users projects Any data collec tion in the project database can be viewed in different forms through a simple drag amp drop operation The documents created in this way consist of tables maps or graphs and are all attached to the project Modifying an object in a collection through one of these documents automatically impacts all the oth er documents present in the project GNSS Studio can support a wide range of surveying applications whether they are conducted in real time or post processing mode What is more GNSS Studio is capable of handling real time and post processing data with in the same project thus opening up new horizons to surveyors GNSS Studio is also GIS friendly Any file in ESRI format available for the considered working area can smoothly be imported into the open workspace as a new project By combining this new background map project with the land survey project surveyors will be able to present their results from a par ticular angle tied to the GIS data available for the area In addition raster im ages of various formats can in the same way be imported into a background proje
305. works in the project You must either observe more vectors to connect the net works exclude the vectors for all but one of the networks or create a new project for each network gt ge g a gt 2 m e er lq DM GNSS Studio then performs a Chi Square test For more information about the Chi Square test refer to Chi Square Test on page 318 After performing this test text similar to the following appears in the message window Chi square test passed Lower limit 4 403788 Upper limit 23 336664 Chi square 22 083307 k Actual measurements may differ in the adjustment of your data files After passing the Chi Square test the program performs a Tau test for each vector A Tau test is performed on the residuals of each vector as a test for blunders The Tau test result for each vector is displayed in the Adjustment Analysis tab of the Workbook window Only those vectors that fail the test are indicated For more details on the background of the Tau test refer to Tau Test on page 323 It is important to note that even if some vectors are flagged as failing the Tau test if the residuals of the vectors are not significantly larger than those for other vectors it is probably acceptable to ignore the results of the test Other tests that are useful in detecting blunders especially in larger net works are the Repeat Vector test and the Loop Closure test Both tests can be used to identify problem vectors you can e
306. xclude them from fur ther adjustment if necessary See also Loop Closure Analysis on page 324 and Repeat Vector Analysis on page 325 311 12 Appendices Network Adjustment 5 If no residuals are flagged you should now have a blunder free adjust 312 ment If more than one control point was entered in the Control Sites tab and only one was held fixed remember that you should hold no more than one fixed at this stage GNSS Studio performs a control tie analysis automatically To see the results click on the Control Tie tab of the Work book window This test provides an indication of how well your survey agrees with the established control you have entered If the ties to one of the control points fail and are significantly larger from ties to other control points then there is good reason to suspect that that control point may be in error This control point should not be used in the constrained adjust ment Once you have completed the minimally constrained adjustment and have ensured that your network is free of blunders you can hold fixed all of the control points you have available and perform a constrained adjustment to derive final site positions and network accuracy Appendices Network Adjustment LI Constrained Adjustment The purpose of this final stage is to adjust your network holding all your con trol sites fixed to obtain final positions that are consistent with the established control g
307. y intermediate positions in the layer stack As long as you handle transparent items the order has no impact on how items are combined on the map On the contrary if you work with opaque items you will have to be careful when you add new layers to the map To move up or down a layer in the list select it and click respectively on the Up or Down arrow button located in the upper right corner of the dialog box To make all items from a layer transparent or opaque edit the layer style dialog box and respectively clear or check the Fill check box 3 m e pa m AN LI Step 15 Closing the Project Select File gt Close Workspace This saves and closes the project contained in the workspace and the workspace as well End of Tutorial 1 See Real Time Survey Tutorial 1 on page 293 for more explanations on this type of survey 45 Tutorials Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Processing Tutorial 2 Stop amp Go Survey Post Process ing Average time required to complete this tutorial 25 minutes LJ Preamble The purpose of this tutorial 1s to make you familiar with the use of GNSS Stu dio in Stop amp Go surveys You will work on the results of a typical survey in which A base station was installed and operated at a known 3D point for about 30 minutes in static mode The raw data collected during this time at the base station has resulted in an observation file that yo
308. y which type of raw data you would like to record if any before you effectively enable data recording O Z 231 5 WinComm Utility Programmable GPS recorder Choose the type of raw data that you would like to insert into the 232 record file s Choose also the format for the selected data as well as the port on which the data will be available The resulting command PDAS or other is automatically formatted in this area according to your choices Automatic Requests While creating the recording file s P skior amenass Fomat ASCISVAR Z M Ask for ephemerides Port a W Ask for lono UTC Using next requests PLAS GPSDAT 1 4 4 4 4 Then send the following commande If necessary edit other commands that you would like the recorder to run after the above one This requires good knowledge of the different commands possible as well as their syntax You can save your lists of commands as a BAT file using the Save button and load them quickly later on using the Load button WinComm Utility Programmable GPS recorder Then click on the OK button This causes WinComm to wait for the next scheduled recording session and perform recording as planned The label of the button changes from Run Program to Stop Program Until the planned recording is complete or you click Stop Program all other buttons in the Programmable GPS Recorder pan
309. yed point Right from previous point Check this button if you want the position you are defining to be somewhere on the right of the previous point this choice will force the extension of the obstruction zone to the right of the previous point even if the azimuth angle of the new point is less than that of the previous one this allows you to go through the 360 0 singular value Align with previous point Check this button if you want the position you are defining to be aligned with the previous point i e same azimuth Left from previous point Check this button if you want the position you are defining to be somewhere on the left of the previous point this choice will force the extension of the obstruction zone to the left of the previous point even if the azimuth angle of the new point is greater than that of the previous one this allows you to go through the 0 360 singular value Add button Click this button to add a point to the definition of the obstruction zone As a result the total number of points see top of dialog box is incremented by one Insert button Click this button to add a point to the definition of the obstruction zone The new point is inserted into the list of points just before the displayed point As a result the total number of points see top of dialog box is incremented by one Delete button Click this button to delete the point displayed above OK button Click this button to validate the entire box conten
310. you first have to transform the reference point into a control point thus allowing you to enter its true coordinates and to have GNSS Studio to use these coordinates rather than those resulting from the survey 305 gt ge g a gt 2 m e er Cq AN 1 2 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter For each surveyed point several vectors were determined that arrive at this point some redundancy in the collected data was introduced in the survey Through the adjustment step you will allow GNSS Studio to merge all these vector solutions into a single most accurate one 5 Static Survey Scheme 1st step Field Survey Assuming the following survey example 1 reference point on which a Tha les Navigation base station collects raw data for about 30 minutes Another receiver for example a Thales Navigation rover 1s moved succes sively on points P1 P2 and P3 The receiver is kept at standstill on each point for about 10 minutes during which raw data is collected by this receiver These logging sequences coincide in time with that performed at the refer ence point Raw Data Logging Baselines An Reference Created files P1log bin P2log bin P3log bin Reflog bin 2nd step Creating a new land survey project with GNSS Studio Use the File gt New command to create a land survey project and a workspace 306 Appendices Supplement to the Tutorials Chapter 3rd step Importin
311. ze is selected for the file you are also allowed to enter an extension into the associated box File Max Size Used to specify whether a single file should be created on the disk No Limits option or the file should be split into 0 7 MB or 1 4 MB segments with an option to store it on floppy disks If you elect to split the file into segments then the system will automati cally add 001 as extension to the name of the first segment This will automatically be incremented for each file segment generated if the file exceeds the selected File Max Size 221 O Z A WinComm Utility Simple GPS recorder Start Recording Clicking this button opens a new dialog box in which you can specify which type of raw data you would like to record if any before you effectively enable data recording Choose the type of raw data that you would like to insert into the record file s Choose also the format for the selected data as well as the port on which the data will be available The resulting command PDAS or other is automatically formatted in this area according to your choices Automatic Requests x While creating the recording file s M Ask for almanacs Format ASCII SVAR F e a V Ask for ephemerides Port a W Ask for lono UTC Using next requests PDAS GPSOAT 1A 4 44 Then send the following commande If necessary edit other commands that you would

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents